You are on page 1of 268

VHF RADIOTELEPHONE

FM-8800D/8800S

FM-8800S/D INTL Ver.


FM-8800: 0550215-02.xx/03.xx
HS-8800: 0550216-01.xx
FM-8800S Russian Ver.
FM-8800: 0550220-01.xx
HS-8800: 0550221-01.xx

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN

Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JUL . 2005


C : AUG . 18, 2010
Pub. No. SME-56420-C
(NAYO ) FM-8800D/S *00015637400*
*00015637400*
* 0 0 0 1 5 6 3 7 4 0 0 *

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The table lists the active speakers according to Volume menu settings and on-hook/off-hook status of the handsets. Regular (DSC
Individual call, other than PSTN) call and PSTN call are set though the individual menu.

Volume Menu Setting On-hook/off-hook FM-8800D/S RB-8810/HS-880 RB-8810/HS-880


Status RB-8800/HS-880 RB-8800/HS-880
Remote station-X Remote station-Other

Monitor OFFHOOK Main Remote Handset Panel Handset Panel Panel Handset Panel Panel
Domain SPKR Handset Station-X ear Speaker ear Speaker Speaker ear Speaker Speaker
XXXX Handset speaker speaker speaker

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1 Private OFF Off-hook Off-hook X
2 On-hook X
3 On-hook Off-hook X
4 On-hook X X X X X X
5 ON Off-hook Off-hook X
6 On-hook X
7 On-hook Off-hook
X
8 On-hook X X X X X X
9 Public OFF Off-hook Off-hook X X X X X X
10 On-hook X X X X X X
11 On-hook Off-hook X X X X
12 On-hook X X X X X X
13 ON Off-hook Off-hook X X X X X X X
14 On-hook X X X X X X X
15 On-hook Off-hook X X X X X X
16 On-hook X X X X X X
(Addenda No.9 of this page is missing.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2/5

Procedure: DSC Test between No. 1 and No. 2 FM-8800S/Ds

Dotted line shows DSC TEST


CALL is received by CH70 WR.

Check LOG

When TEST ACK is transmitted from own


ship, “TEST ACK” log is not recorded in
“RCVED ORDINARY” window.

Fig. 1 Communication Test

1) On No. 1 FM-8800S/D, press [CALL] key to create DSC message.

- CALL TYPE : Test


- SHIP ID : MMSI of No. 2 VHF Own ship

2) Press and hold down [CALL] key more than 3 seconds to transmit DSC message on
No. 1 FM-8800S/D. “Call in progress on CH70” message appears and immediately
“Test request call received” message appears. And then alarm is output.
Press [CANCEL] key and stop the alarm.

Note: This is a “loop-back” test where the transmitted signal is received from CH70
WR and this RX message appears on the window.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3/5

3) On No. 2 FM-8800S/D, TEST message is received from No. 1 FM-8800S/D. “Test


request call received” message appears and alarm is released.
Press [CANCEL] key and stop the alarm.

4) Press [ENT] key on No. 2 FM-8800S/D. Then “Received Message” window is


changed to “Send Message” one.
Press and hold down [CALL] key more than 3 seconds to transmit TEST ACK
message.
After the transmission, the “CH16” window is displayed.

5) No. 1 FM-8800S/D receives “TEST ACK” message from No. 2 FM-8800S/D. And
then “Test acknowledge received” message appears and alarm is released.
Press [CANCEL] key and stop the alarm.

6) On No. 1 FM-8800S/D, check the “TEST ACK” message received from No. 2
FM-8800S/D.

7) On No. 1 FM-8800S/D, open “RCVD ORDINARY” LOG and check an unread icon
“TEST CALL” and a LOG of “TEST ACK”.

8) DSC Test from No. 2 FM-8800S/D to No. 1 FM-8800S/D is made in accordance with
the above procedure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4/5

DSC Test by only one FM-8800S/D


Note: When RT ANT is used together with CH70 WR ANT, TX radio wave is transmitted to
RX Circuit of CH70 WR. So, function test for DSC and CH70 WR can be carried out.

Procedure:

1) Select [SHIFT] -> [5: ACK] and set to “MANUAL ACK”.


2) If possible, select [MENU] -> ERASE LOG and delete a LOG of “RCVED
ORDINARY”.
3) Select [MENU] -> [0: HI/LO] and set a power to “LOW”.

Dotted line shows DSC TEST


CALL is received by CH70 WR.

Check LOG

Fig. 2 Communication Test by only one VHF

1) Press [CALL] key to create DSC message.

- CALL TYPE : Test


- SHIP ID : MMSI of No. 2 VHF Own ship

2) Press and hold down [CALL] key more than 3 seconds to transmit DSC message.
“Call in progress on CH70” message appears and immediately “Test request call
received” message appears. And then alarm is released. Press [CANCEL] key and
stop the alarm.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5/5

3) Press [ENT] key. Then “Received Message” window is changed to “Send Message”.
Press and hold down [CALL] key more than 3 seconds to transmit TEST ACK
message.
After the transmission, the “CH16” window is displayed.

4) Open “RCVD ORDINARY” LOG window and check a LOG of “TEST CALL”.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2/6

Changes in FM-8800D/S system

1. Software update history


No. 6 and 7 units in below table are manufactured in October 2009.

INTL or Ext. ALM CPU Board Type


No. Unit Software Ver. ITU-R No. RTC kit
Russian output Ver. approval

not
1 INTL Normal Open 0550215-03.06 05P0773 M.493-10 MED
equipped
2 Russia Normal Open 0550220-01.03 05P0773A M.493-11 Russian equipped
FM-8800 INTL not
3 Normal Close 0550215-03.06 05P0773B M.493-10 MED
S/D equipped
4 Russia Normal Close 0550220-01.03 05P0773C M.493-11 Russian equipped
5 INTL Normal Open 0550215-04.01 05P0773D M.493-11 MED equipped
6 INTL Normal Close 0550215-04.01 05P0773E M.493-11 MED equipped
7 INTL 0550216-01.03 05P0781 M.493-11 MED
HS-8800
8 Russia 0550211-01.02 05P0781A M.493-11 Russian

Note: Alarm output of CPU Board, “Normal Open” or “Normal “Close” can be selected.
On all boards, the program can be updated to be compliant with Recommendation
ITU-R M.493-11.

2. DMC-5, not connectable


When the program of software is updated to 04.01/01.03, DMC-5 is not connectable. So,
install IC-350 in place of DMC-5.

3. AUTO REVERT function


“AUTO REVERT” function is selected from User menu. Remote Handset has the same
function.

4. Contrast adjustment
Contrast is adjusted in “CONTRAST” menu. To reset it to the default setting, press and
hold down [SHIFT] key.

5. Position Data
The data of own ship’s position is displayed in 1/10000 min. and it is displayed on
“Received Message” and “Send Message” windows.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3/6

6. Distress relay
When the same distress relay message is received more than twice within one hour, the
alarm is not activated.

7. Compose Message
The indication on “Compose Message” window is
changed from “TCmd1” and “TCmd2” to “KAIND”,
“COMM MODE” and “COMM MODE”.
On the last line, a message is displayed whether
transmitted message is requested ACK or not. “ACK
REQ” message is displayed for Call and Distress alert
and “NO ACK REQ” is displayed for all Call and Group
call. “Polling Call” and “AREA CALL” are deleted from
this window.

8. Transceiver unit and Remote Handset Operation Panel


The indications of “AUTO CH” setting and “DATA/TIME” from RTC are added on the
operational panel.
Position data is displayed in 1/10 000 min.

FM-8800S/D Operation Panel Remote Handset Operation Panel

- AUTO CH: ENB/DIS (Set in [MENU] -> AUTO CH)


The state of AUTO ACK is set to ON and ON-HOOK.
When receiving the INDVIDUAL/ROUTINE call, communication CH is changed
automatically after transmitting AUTO ACK.
When CH is set to “ENA”, it changes automatically. And when set to “DIS”, it changes
manually.

- Year/Day/Time
Year/Month/Date/Time data using for LOG of Time stamp are displayed.
Data priority is displayed in ZDA > RMC > manual. When it is set by manual, set data in
[MENU] -> RTC.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4/6

9. Pop-up window when MMSI is not registered


When turning on the power without registration of MMSI, the pop-up message displayed
is changed from “NO MMSI” to “This unit CAN’T send any DSC calls until ship’s MMSI is
entered. Press any key!”.

10. RTC (Real Time Clock) function


This function is required in Recommendation M.493-11. If the program of software is
updated to Ver. 0550215-04.01 without the RTC kit, this function does not work
normally.

Note: RCT Function


This function is used for Time stamp in the [LOG] menu. Priority of time data is ZDA >
RMC > manual. When time is set by manual, it is set in [MENU] -> RTC. From
receiving DSC Distress message, the elapsed time is counted by RTC. The
transmission time-out period is 23.5 H. Upon time-out, Distress Alert is deleted from
“DISTRESS RCVED LOG”. The backup time of RTC is held one week or more.

Name: RTC BOARD KIT


Type: FM-8800-RTC-KIT
Code No.: 001-078-040-00

Add RTC Board (05P0804)

Connect to J14 on CPU Board

Front panel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5/6

11. Cancel of Distress Alert


DSC Distress Alert can be cancelled from DSC message.
Cancelled DSC message is as shown in Fig. 1.
After this message is transmitted, the distress alert is cancelled by a radio telephone
and it is available on “CH16”.
To use this function, “SELF TERMINATE” in SYSTEM menu is set to “ON”. The default
setting is “ON”.

Waiting ACK
[Distress] Cancelled?
[CANCEL]
button pressed
button pressed

Sending DIS.
canceling MSG. by DSC
Sending DIS. canceling
MSG. by voice

Fig. 1: Cancelled MSG. RCVED

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6/6

12. Alarm sound


The alarm sound level when receiving all DSC messages turns up increasingly.

Freq: Freq: Duration: Duration:


ALM sound
Tone-1 Tone-2 Tone-1 Tone-2
Distress Received 2200 Hz 1300 Hz 250 ms 250 ms
Distress ACK Received 2200 Hz 1300 Hz 500 ms 500 ms
Urgency Received 2200 Hz Silence 250 ms 250 ms
Urgency ACK Received 2200 Hz Silence 500 ms 500 ms
Routine Received 150 Hz 100 Hz 1000 ms 500 ms
Safety Received 150 Hz 100 Hz 1000 ms 500 ms
Routine ACK Received 150 Hz 100 Hz 1000 ms 1000 ms
Safety ACK Received 150 Hz 100 Hz 1000 ms 1000 ms
Warning 2000 Hz Silence 250 ms 500 ms
Press DIS button 2000 Hz Silence 500 ms 500 ms

Note: Alarm sound level is adjusted in SYSTEM menu -> “MAX VOL ADJ”.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu Tree

(Program: INTL Ver. 0550215-04.01)


1 User menu
Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note
4H
3H
POSITION
2H
OLDER
1H
0.5 H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON Fixed on “ON”
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
STATUS UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
UNABLE EQUIP DISBLD Selects when COMPLY STATUS is
AUTO ACK
REASON MODE UNAVAIL UNABLE
CH UNAVAIL
OFF
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD
ORDINARY
ERASE xxxx
RCVD
ERASE LOG ARE YOU SURE?
DISTRESS
YES NO
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
For CH MODE, indicates
USA
MODE when setting to ON.
MEMORY WX 50 entry
For INLAND-WA, indicates
CHANNEL CANADA
when entering ATIS ID.
INLND-WA
ERASE
COAST CALL
MESSAGE SHIP CALL For editing message of each CALL
100 entry
FILE ENTRY GROUP CALL type (Refer to the DSC Call menu.)
PSTN CALL
AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME
DATE 2009-10-27 DATE/TIME used to Time
RTC stamp of LOG
TIME 06:32:55
ZDA > RMC > manual
AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE
9 (8 to 16)
LEVEL
INTERCOM It can be set up independently of
8 (1 to 16)
VOLUME Remote Handset.
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
VOLUME
MONITOR PUB
DOMAIN
REGULAR PRIV
SERVICE
MONITOR PUB
DOMAIN PSTN
PRIV
SERVICE
ENABLE The state of AUTO ACK is set to
ON and ON-HOOK.
When received the
AUTO CH AUTO CH INDVIDUAL/ROUTINE call,
DISABLE
Communication CH changes
automatically after returning AUTO
ACK or it dies not change.
When not specifying TEL CH from
COAST with PSTN CALL from
PROPOSE CH PROPOSE CH 00 COAST to SHIP, assign the CH,
which is set in this time, to ACK
BQ message.
NEUTRAL ABLE When setting ABLE, NEUTRAL
SPECIAL CALL UNABLE CALL and MEDICAL CALL in
CALL MEDICAL ABLE SPECIAL menu of CALL TYPE for
CALL UNABLE DSC are selectable.
CONTRAST CONTRAST 7 (0 to 15)
ON
AUTO REVET AUTO REVET
OFF
SELF ID e.g. 432456789 Only for checking MMSI
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID
message recorded in MESSAGE
LIST
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] -> [4:IntCom],
1: Handset 1
SYSTEM INTERCOM the recorded name in the left box is
2: Handset 2
NAMING indicated to recognize the caller side
3: Handset 3
easily.
4: Handset 4
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550215-xx
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2 System Menu

System menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Note


ID ENTRY
SELF ID
ID CLEAR
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID LIST message recorded in MESSAGE
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] ->
1: Handset 1
INTERCOM [4:IntCom], the recorded names
2: Handset 2
NAMING in the left box are displayed to
3: Handset 3
recognize the caller side easily.
4: Handset 4

FM8800D/S - DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D


PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550215-04
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.
ON
AUTO 1W
OFF
ID ENTRY xxxxxxxxx
ID CLEAR
ATIS ID
RIVER
AREA Selectable by recording ATIS ID.
RIVER & SEA
CH70 BOARD CH70 BOARD No function
INTL
USA
WX
MODE
CANADA
INLND-WA
Switch by pressing [1] or [2] key.
PRIV
When pressing [CANCEL] key,
CHANNEL XX
CH CONFIG “TURN OFF/ON” is displayed.
TX ENABLE
And then, turn off the power to
TRX RX ENABLE record.
UNABLE
DUP
DUP/SIMP
SIMP
HI
TX POWER
LOW
ON
INTL
OFF
ON
USA/WX
OFF
ON
CH MODE CANADA
OFF
ON Switch ON/OFF by entering
INLND
OFF ATIS ID.
ON
PRIV
OFF

Cont’d

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


System menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Note
ON
SCAN
OFF
SCAN/DW
ON
DW
OFF
ON Effective for FM-8800D,
SP MUTE Set up ON/OFF for SP at the
OFF
time of Duplex operation.
ON
TIMEOUT TIMER Effective for USA channel
OFF
HI 170 (0 to 255)
TX POWER LOW 44 (0 to 255)
TEMP. REDUCE 134 (0 to 255)
HI Select HI power or LOW
POWER HI power, and test by the selected
LOW
power.
Select DSC or ATIS, and test
DSC or ATIS
TONE TEST by the selected mode.
MARK
SPACE
Output by PTT ON
DOT
CARRIER
INTL
REGULATION
RUSSIAN
1 No function
REMOTE ID
2 1: Master 2: Slave
VDR OUTPUT
8 (1 to 16)
LEVEL
ON Enter the password: 652111
EEROM NO CLEAR
PROTECTED OFF MMSI CLEAR
ALL CLEAR
** DSC RX TEST **
T/A ”OUTPUT RX DSC DATA
TO NMEA PORT”

Cont’d

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


System menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Note
FSK LOOP
REMOTE
LOOP TEST LOOP
NMEA
LOOP
ALL “ALL” is automatically
RAM executed. And then, RAM,
CPU MEMORY TEST
ROM ROM and EEPROM are
EEPROM checked.
Prints out
PRINTER
“FM-8800 PRINTER TEST”.
The detailed version is
FM-8800:
PROG. VER. displayed after pressing [Shift]
0550215-04
-> [1] key 5 times.
LCD TEST
BACK LIGHT 1 1 to 4
KEY
CH
PANEL
VOL
UI TEST User Interface Test
SQ
PTT
HOOK
AGC Test
AGC No function
TEST out
CH70 RX
LOOP
Loop Back Test
P: 0 /A: 9066
155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, used in a factory.
165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC
out
APC No function
CH
DUP/SIMP
xx
RX IF
LEVEL
TX/RX
RX AF
NOISE
CH70 RX IF
STATUS
LEVEL Monitor the selected state by
CH70 RX “CH DUP/SIMP xx” channel.
AF NOISE
PLL1 UL
LEVEL
PLL2 UL
LEVEL
EXIT: ENT

Cont’d

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


System menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Note
155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, use in a factory.
DUP RX 165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC No function
out
TEST DDS
P: 100 / A: 19655
4528 L Input/Output Test
DDS/CODEC
P: 100 / A: 19962 for CODEC and DDS
4528 R
P: 100 / A: 19803
SHIP
STATION TYPE Not to be changed.
COAST
RESET DSP
M943-11 When setting to M943-11,
TCmd1, TCmd2 of RX
COMPATIBLE message is checked. If it is
M943-10
TCmd which is not defined as
M943-11, it does not receive.
OFF Function for USCG
USCG MODE
ON
OFF For ITU-R M1080:
FNAS MODE
ON Max. 10 digits of MMSI
SELF OFF Set up ON/OFF for DIS
TERMINATE ON cancellation by DSC
MAX VOL ADJ 5 Set maximum of ALM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3. DSC Call Menu

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


COAST ID 00________
ROUTINE
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
COMM TELEPHONE When the category is SAFETY or
MODE DATA URGENCY, TELEPHONE is fixed.
COMM
NO INFO
OPTION
COAST - When the category is SAFETY, CH is
CALL selected from CH list when selecting
SELECT CH. Also, the optional CH
can be input when selecting
CH NO INFO MANUAL.
- When the category is URGENCY,
CH16 is fixed.
- When the category is ROUTINE,
NOINFO is fixed.
ACK REQ
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
COMM TELEPHONE When the category is SAFETY or
MODE DATA URGENCY, TELEPHONE is fixed.
COMM
NO INFO
OPTION
SHIP CALL - When the category is Safety, CH is
SELECT CH selected from CH list when selecting
SELECT CH. Also, the optional CH
can be input when selecting
CH MANUAL.
- When the category is URGENCY,
MANUAL
CH16 is fixed.
- When the category is ROUTINE, NO
INFO is fixed.
ACK REQ
GROUP ID 0xxxxxxxx
Category ROUTINE Fixed on “ROUTINE”.
COMM
TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”.
MODE
COMM
NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”.
GROUP OPTION
CALL CH is selected from CH list when
SELECT CH selecting SELECT CH. Also, the
CH
optional CH can be input when
NO INFO selecting MANUAL.
NO ACK
REQ

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note
COAST ID 00xxxxxx
ALLMODES TP
COMM Select CH from [MENU] -> PSTN
DUPLEX TP
MODE CH
DATA
PSTN CALL
COMM
NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
OPTION
TEL xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Max. 16 digits
ACK REQ
SAFETY
Category
URGENCY
COMM
TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”.
MODE
COMM
NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”.
OPTION
SELECT CH xx - When the category is Safety, CH is
ALL SHIPS selected from SIMP-CH list when
selecting SELECT CH. Also, the
optional CH can be input when
CH
MANUAL selecting MANUAL.
- When the category is URGENCY,
CH16 is fixed and MANUAL is not
displayed.
NO ACK REQ
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
Category SAFETY Fixed on “SAFETY”.
POSITION
KIND Fixed on “POSITION REQUEST”.
POSITION REQUEST
COMM
NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”.
OPTION
ACK REQ
STATION ID xxxxxxxxx
Category SAFETY Fixed on “SAFETY”.
KIND TEST Fixed on “TEST”.
TEST
COMM
NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”.
OPTION
ACK REQ

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note
xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
KIND DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
Sinking
RELAY
Disabled & Adr
ALL
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”
COAST ID 00xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
KIND DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
Sinking
RELAY SEL
Disabled & Adr
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE Fixed on “CH16”
ACK REQ

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note
NEUTRAL CRAFT Fixed on “NEUTRAL CRAFT”
Category URGENCY Fixed on “URGENCY”
COMM MODE TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
KIND Fixed on “NEUTRAL CRAFT”
CRAFT
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16”
NO ACK REQ
SPECIAL MEDICAL
Note: Fixed on “MEDICAL TRANSPORT”
TRANSPORT
Category URGENCY Fixed on “URGENCY”
COMM MODE TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”
MEDICAL
MEDICAL
KIND Fixed on “MEDICAL TRANSPORT”
TRSPRT
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16
NO ACK REQ
UNDESIGNATED Default
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
NATURE Listing
Sinking
Disabled & Adr
DISTRESS Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE
ACK REQ

Note: When setting “NEUTRAL” and “MEDICAL” in [MENU] -> SPECIAL


CALL to ABLE, these menus can be opened.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Remote Handset Menu (Program: Ver. 0550216-01.03)
To call the below menus, press [MENU] key.
Setting values in Remote Handset [MENU] and FM-8800S/D [MENU] are the same,
and the way of setting also. DSC Call menu from Remote Handset is the same as “3.5
DSC Call menu.”

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4


4H
3H
POSITION OLDER 2H
1H
0.5 H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
ABLE
COMPLY STATUS
UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
AUTO ACK UNABLE REASON EQUIP DISBLD
MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD ORDINARY
RCVD DISTRESS
ERASE LOG
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
USA
MEMORY WX 50 entry
CHANNEL CANADA
INLND-WA
ERASE
COAST CALL
MESSAGE SHIP CALL
100 entry
FILE ENTRY GROUP CALL
PSTN CALL
AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME
DATE 2006-03-27
RTC
TIME 06:32:55

Cont’d

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4
AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE 9 (8 to 16)
VOLUME INTERCOM 8 (1 to 16)
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
ENABLE
AUTO CH AUTO CH
DISABLE
PROPOSE CH PSTN CH 00
CONTRAST CONTRAST 2
AUTO ON
AUTO REVERT
REVERT OFF
ABLE
NEUTRAL CALL
SPECIAL UNABLE
CALL ABLE
MEDICAL CALL
UNABLE
SELF ID e.g. 432456789
GROUP ID LIST
RT: FM8800
1: Handset 1
INTERCOM NAMING 2: Handset 2
SYSTEM
3: Handset 3
4: Handset 4
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM VERSION 0550215-04
EXT: ENT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents

Check List

Chapter 1. Overview
1.1 General ....................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Configurations ...............................................................................................1-1

1.2 Operation .................................................................................................................1-3


1.2.1 LCD display ...................................................................................................1-3
1.2.2 LCD display and Operation ...........................................................................1-4

Chapter 2. Location of Parts


2.1 Main Unit .................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Panel ..............................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Interior ...........................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Board .............................................................................................................2-7

2.2 Handset/Remote ......................................................................................................2-13


2.2.1 HS-2003 .........................................................................................................2-13
2.2.2 RB-8800/HS-8800 .........................................................................................2-14
2.2.3 RB-8810/HS-8800 .........................................................................................2-15

2.3 Junction Box/DMC IF .............................................................................................2-17


2.3.1 Junction Box: IF-8810 ...................................................................................2-17
2.3.2 DMC IF: IF-8820 ..........................................................................................2-18

2.4 VHF Console: RC-8800 ..........................................................................................2-19

2.5 Printer: PP-8800 ......................................................................................................2-20

Chapter 3. Menu Tree


3.1 Main Menu List (INTL Ver.) .....................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 User menu (INTL Ver.)....................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Option menu (INTL Ver.) ................................................................................3-3

3.2 DSC Call Menu (INTL Ver.) .....................................................................................3-7

3.3 Remote Handset Menu (INTL Ver.) ..........................................................................3-12

3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.) .................................................................................3-14


3.4.1 User menu (Russian Ver.) ................................................................................3-14
3.4.2 Option menu (Russian Ver.).............................................................................3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

3.5 DSC Call Menu (Russian Ver.)..................................................................................3-20

3.6 Remote Handset Menu (Russian Ver.).......................................................................3-24

Chapter 4. System Setting


4.1 Call up for Option Menu .........................................................................................4-1

4.2 ID Setting .................................................................................................................4-3


4.2.1 SELF ID .........................................................................................................4-3
4.2.2 GROUP ID .....................................................................................................4-4
4.2.3 Setting Remote Handset ID ...........................................................................4-6
4.2.4 INTERCOM NAMING .................................................................................4-7
4.2.5 Setting of Transceiver unit function ID .........................................................4-9
4.2.6 ATIS ID Setting .............................................................................................4-10

4.3 System Setting: User Menu .....................................................................................4-12


4.3.1 ALARM .........................................................................................................4-12
1. POSITION OLDER ....................................................................................4-12
2. EXT ALARM .............................................................................................4-13
4.3.2 AUTO ACK ...................................................................................................4-14
1. COMPLY STATUS, UNABLE REASON ..................................................4-14
2. POSITION CALL, POLLING CALL ........................................................4-15
4.3.3 MEMORY CHANNEL ..................................................................................4-15
4.3.4 MESSAGE FILE ENTRY .............................................................................4-16
4.3.5 POSITION .....................................................................................................4-18
4.3.6 RTC (Russian Ver.) ..........................................................................................4-19
4.3.7 PRINT OUT ...................................................................................................4-19
4.3.8 VOLUME ......................................................................................................4-20
4.3.9 AUTO CH (Russian Ver.) ..............................................................................4-21
4.3.10 PSTN CH (Russian Ver.) ...............................................................................4-21
4.3.11 SPECIAL CALL (Russian Ver.) ....................................................................4-21

4.4 System Setting: Option Menu .................................................................................4-22


4.4.1 AUTO 1W ......................................................................................................4-22
4.4.2 AUTO REVERD ...........................................................................................4-22
4.4.3 CH70 BOARD ...............................................................................................4-22
4.4.4 CH CONFIG ..................................................................................................4-23
4.4.5 CH MODE .....................................................................................................4-24
4.4.6 SCAN/DW .....................................................................................................4-24
4.4.7 SP MUTE .......................................................................................................4-26
4.4.8 TIMEOUT TIMER ........................................................................................4-26
4.4.9 REGULATION ..............................................................................................4-27
4.4.10 VDR OUTPUT LEVEL ...............................................................................4-27
4.4.11 STATION TYPE ..........................................................................................4-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

4.5 Jumper Setting .........................................................................................................4-29


4.5.1 Remote station ...............................................................................................4-29
4.5.2 Select Wing MIC ...........................................................................................4-31
4.5.3 When using Handset with removed (HS-2003) .............................................4-32

4.6 When TR Antenna is used for CH70 WR..................................................................4-33

4.7 μTP-80F Setup ......................................................................................................4-34


1. DIP Switch Setting ........................................................................................4-35
4.8 Change the Specification Power for PR-240-CE ....................................................4-36

Chapter 5. Block Description


5.1 Outline of Connection .............................................................................................5-1

5.2 I/O Port Specification ..............................................................................................5-2


5.2.1 IEC61162/REMOTE Port (D-Sub 37P) .......................................................5-2
5.2.2 PRINTER Port(D-Sub 25P) .........................................................................5-3
5.2.3 Handset MIC Connector ...............................................................................5-3

5.3 Outline of Boards ....................................................................................................5-4

5.4 Block Description ....................................................................................................5-6


5.4.1 CH70 RX (05P0775) ....................................................................................5-6
5.4.2 DUP RX (05P0777) ......................................................................................5-8
5.4.3 TX/RX (05P0774) ........................................................................................5-10
5.4.4 DUPLEXER .................................................................................................5-16
5.4.5 CPU (05P0773) ............................................................................................5-18
5.4.6 PWR (05P0776) ............................................................................................5-25
5.4.7 HS CONT (05P0781) ...................................................................................5-27

Chapter 6. Measurement
6.1 Adjustment ...............................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Output Power .................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Measurement ...........................................................................................................6-3


6.2.1 VHF Frequency .............................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 CH70 Output ..................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3 DSC Tone Frequency .....................................................................................6-5
6.2.4 Spurious Emission .........................................................................................6-7
6.2.5 Frequency deviation for a radiotelephone .....................................................6-8
6.2.6 Sensitivity of a radiotelephone: NQ method .................................................6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Chapter 7. Updating Program


7.1 Updating ..................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Program file ...................................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Note ...............................................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 Setup ..............................................................................................................7-4

7.2 Updating Procedure .................................................................................................7-7


7.2.1 Procedure .......................................................................................................7-7
7.2.2 Check the detailed program number ..............................................................7-10

Chapter 8. Maintenance
8.1 Self-test and Error Message .....................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Daily test ........................................................................................................8-1
1. TX POWER ...................................................................................................8-1
2. TX/RX PCB ...................................................................................................8-2
3. CPU PCB .......................................................................................................8-2
4. CH70 RX PCB ...............................................................................................8-3
5. DUP RX PCB ................................................................................................8-3
8.1.2 Error messages ..............................................................................................8-4
1. PLL1 Unlock .................................................................................................8-4
2. PLL2 Unlock .................................................................................................8-4
3. GPS ERROR (EPFS ERROR) ......................................................................8-4
4. Printer PE .......................................................................................................8-4
5. NO MMSI ......................................................................................................8-4
6. System ERROR .............................................................................................8-4
7. RTC ERROR Input RTC ...............................................................................8-4

8.2 DSC Communication Test .......................................................................................8-6

8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP .........................................................................................8-8


8.3.1 T/A..................................................................................................................8-8
8.3.2 TEST menu ...................................................................................................8-8
1. CPU ...............................................................................................................8-8
2. PANEL ...........................................................................................................8-10
3. CH70 RX .......................................................................................................8-12
4. TX/RX ...........................................................................................................8-13
5. DUP RX .........................................................................................................8-16
6. DDS/CODEC .................................................................................................8-16
7. RESET DSP ...................................................................................................8-17

8.4 Memory Clear ..........................................................................................................8-18

8.5 Compatibility of Boards ..........................................................................................8-19

8.6 Remote Handset Test ...............................................................................................8-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Chapter 9. Q & A
Q1. How can we use VHF exclusively? ........................................................................9-1
Q2. What are the differences between FM-8800D and FM-8800S? .............................9-1
Q3. Please tell me the priority of communication order. ...............................................9-1
Q4. Do the Transceiver unit and Remote Handset have to be installed in designated
location? ................................................................................................................9-1
Q5. Receptible sentence. ...............................................................................................9-1
Q6. Please tell me about the Alarm output. ...................................................................9-2
Q7. Can Carbon MIC be used in place Wing MIC? ......................................................9-2
Q8. Can Remote Handset be used alone without Transceiver Handset on? ..................9-2
Q9. Does Remote Handset have to be wired in daisy chain? ........................................9-2
Q10. Can VHF antenna be used together with CH70 WR antenna? .............................9-2
Q11. Is a Junction Box:IF-8810 necessary? ..................................................................9-2
Q12. How to adjust LCD contrast? ...............................................................................9-3
Q13. How to cancel menu’s protection? ........................................................................9-3
Q14. Please tell me what to check after installing. ........................................................9-3
Q15. How do I adjust the frequency? ............................................................................9-3
Q16. How do I measure DSC tone frequency? .............................................................9-3
Q17. Will the Program-Ver. indication remain the same even after updating the
program? ................................................................................................................9-4
Q18. Is the Main program commonly used for FM-8800D and FM-8800S? ...............9-4
Q19. I cannot update the program/How do I update the program? (Case 1) .................9-4
Q20. I cannot update the program/How do I update the program? (Case 2) .................9-4
Q21. Remote Handset is not working properly. . ............................................................9-4
Q22. I cannot receive DSC signals although telephone is working just fine. ...............9-4
Q23. What are the differences between 05P0774A and B on TX/RX PCB? ................9-5
Q24. What is a DISTRESS MODE? .............................................................................9-5
Q25. How can I clear memory? .....................................................................................9-5
Q26. When I make All Ship Call from No.1 VHF, I could not receive signals
through No.2 VHF. Is the equipment broken? ...................................................9-5
Q27. Communication does not seem to be working correctly when Remote Handsets
are connected. ....................................................................................................9-5
Q28. When I turn on the power, alarm keeps going off and nothing comes up
on the display. ....................................................................................................9-5
Q29. Would disconnecting or short-circuiting antenna break Transceiver unit? ..........9-6
Q30. “DSC-5’’ indication appears after a self-test with DMC-5. Is this okay? ............9-6
Q31. Please tell me about where to install the antennas. ..............................................9-6
Q32. What is the min. horizontal length between VHF Antennas? ...............................9-6
Q33. Please tell me about where to install the VHF. .....................................................9-6
Q34. Does a VHF Rack-consol have a type? ................................................................9-6
Q35. Please tell me about RS-485. ................................................................................9-6
Q36. Please tell me about communication range? .........................................................9-7
Q37. An inspector cautioned me about contents of COMSAR/Cir.32
regarding installation of equipment. What is it about? ......................................9-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Appendix 1) Specifications
1. General ......................................................................................................................AP1-1
2. Transmitter .................................................................................................................AP1-1
3. Receiver .....................................................................................................................AP1-2
4. DSC ...........................................................................................................................AP1-2
5. CH70 WATCH Receiver ............................................................................................AP1-2
6. Power Supply .............................................................................................................AP1-3
7. Digital Interface .........................................................................................................AP1-3
8. Environmental Conditions .........................................................................................AP1-3
9. Coating Color ............................................................................................................AP1-4

Appendix 2) Channel List


AP2.1 International/USA/Canadian/Inland Waterways ................................................AP2-1
AP2.2 US Weather Channel ..........................................................................................AP2-3
AP2.3 Private Channel ..................................................................................................AP2-4

Parts List .......................................................................................... D-1

Contents of Drawings ..................................................................... S-0

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Check Check
ListList

How to call up option menus (MMSI registration etc,)


1. Make a jumper connection between #2 and #15 on [PRINTER] port. Or, jumper
connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810.
2. [Menu] -> System -> [ENT] -> Password: xxxxxx
(Same as FM-8500, Ref to FQ-2005-015)

No. Items Remarks and Reference Pages Judge


1. Installation
Make sure VHF ANT and CH70 ANT connecters
1.1
are watertight.
Make sure of Grounding:
1.2
Transceiver unit, Junction Box and DMC IF
As for the connections of Junction Box, DMC IF
1.3 and a terminal board of Remote station, is the
wiring correct? Are they connected tightly?
Does the emergency light turn on the light and
1.4
control dimmer?
Is Transceiver unit supplied by the Reserve
1.5
Source?
See page 4-13.
In case of Normal Open (Close),
alarm output is always active
1.6 Make sure of ALM output wiring.
when receiving DIS/URG
messages. Conform with the
Drive circuits diagram.
2. Setup
See page 4-18.
2.1 Are Pos. and time data inputted automatically? IEC61162-1: GGA > RMC >
GNS > GLL, ZDA
See page 4-3.
Menu->System->MMSI
2.2 Have you registered MMSI correctly? Note: DSC communication is not
carried out without MMSI being
registered.
See page 4-6.
Turn on the power while pressing
2.3 Have you registered Remote Handset ID number? Remote Handset [Menu] key.
To assign the same number is
prohibited.
Have you registered the Name of Transceiver unit See page 4-7.
2.4 and Remote Handset? Register by [MENU] -> SYSTEM
(Remote Handset Name) ->INTERCOM NAMING
See page 4-24.
2.5 Have you set up CH MODE? The factory setting is INTL.
MENU->SYSTEM->CH MODE
Have you set up OFFHOOK SPKR? See page 4-20.
2.6 (ON/OFF set up of SP at the time when a Menu->VOLUME->OFF HOOK
handset is OFF HOOK) SPKR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Check List

3. Adjustment and Measurement


See page 6-1.
Is TX output between 20 and 25 W?
3.1 As for CH70 measurement, see
Is reflection power lower than 2 W (10%)?
page 6-4.
See page 6-3.
3.2 Is the frequency tolerance within +10 ppm?
There is no adjustment part.
See page 6-5. ,
There is no adjustment part. It is
3.3 Is the tone frequency tolerance within +10 Hz? measured by monitoring tone with
other VHF because there is no
checkpoint.
See page 4-27.
3.4 Is the output level for VDR appropriate? 0 dBm is outputted by the factory
setting.
4. Function Test
See page 8-1.
Before the check, press PTT SW.
4.1 Is the Daily Test result all okay? In case of no transmitting, TX
output check is shown NO
CHECK.
See page 8-9 and 4-19.
Print setup is carried out by
Menu->Print out
4.2 Can you print out correctly? When the printer does not work,
carry out a self-test of a printer.
- PP-510: LF + Power ON
- uTP-80F: Feed + Power ON
See page 8-6.
To transmit DSC messages,
- Call type: Individual
4.3 Is the DSC communication test okay? (SHIP CALL)
- Category: Routine
TX output is automatically
reduced to 1 W.
4.4 Is the INTERCOM operation correct? See page 4-8.
4.5 Is the Remote Handset operation correct?
See page 4-31.
4.6 Are the Wing-MICs operation correct? Dynamic MIC and Carbon MIC
setup are J5 on the CPU board.
5. Other
Are MMSI and CS etc, labels stuck around
5.1
Transceiver unit?
Have you had explained enough to the users about
5.2
operation?

ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 1. Overview
1.1 General

1.1 General
FM-8800S and FM-8800D are the international VHF radiotelephones that are farther
developed as successors to FM-8500 and FM-8700.
Outline of the unit:
1. Built-in Class A DSC function and CH70 WR.
2. The FM-8800S offers simplex/semi-duplex, the FM-8800D offers simplex/full
duplex voice communication.
In addition, Russian Ver. obtain Russian Type approval by FM-8800S.
3. PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) call function is installed.
4. Outputs the other ship’s position from DSC Distress message received information
by TLL sentences.
5. ATIS (Automatic Transmitter Identification System) is installed.
6. Remote Handset can be connected to the maximum of 4 sets via IF-8810 or/and
IF-8820.
7. Intercommunication system is available through each Remote Handset.
8. The CH70 WR antenna can be used either exclusively or can be shared with VHF
antenna.
9. The power supply is 24 VDC+30 % and –10 %. AC power supply unit (PR-240-CE)
is optional.
10. Connect the Printer directly and it prints out the DSC TX/RX messages, the DSC
communication logs and the test results.

1.1.1 Configurations
Case - 1)
Total 4 sets
W-MIC W-MIC RB-8800/HS-8800 or(and) RB-8810/HS-8800

RB-8800/HS-8800 RB-8810/HS-8800

VHF ANT CH70 ANT


VDR(AF output)

EXT Alarm
GPS
TLL output Junction box
(IF-8810)

HS-2003

Printer: EXT SP
- PP-510,
- PP-8800
24VDC AC-DC Power 100-220VAC
(PR-240-CE)
Fig. 1.1.1 Connection Case-1

1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.1 General

Case - 2) DMC-5 Installation Note; INTL Ver. only (except for Russian Ver.)
DMC-5 is connected via DMC IF (IF-8820).
Handset (RB-8800/HS-8800 and RB-8810/HS-8800) can be connected to the maximum
of 4 sets via IF-8810 and/or IF-8820.

RB-8800/HS-8800 RB-8810/HS-8800

NOTE:
Total 4 sets
RB-8800/HS-8800
or (and) RB-8810/HS-8800

DMC IF
DMC-5
(IF-8820)

W-MIC W-MIC

RB-8800/HS-8800

VHF ANT CH70 ANT


VDR (AF output)

EXT Alarm
Junction box GPS
TLL output
(IF-8810)

HS-2003

Printer: EXT SP
- PP-510,
- PP-8800
24VDC AC-DC Power 100-220VAC
(PR-240-CE)

Fig. 1.1.2 Connection Case-2, DMC-5 Installation

1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Operation

1.2 Operation
1.2.1 LCD display

INTL Ver.
Russian Ver.
(1) INTL SHIFT (7) (17R)
(1) INTL SHIFT (7)
(2)

(3)
(4)

(5) (6)
Hi
Rx 16
DUP SCAN
(8)

(9) (10)
(2)

(3)
(4)
Hi
Rx 16 (8)

(5) (6) DUP SCAN (9) (10)


(11) AUTO ACK WATCH CH70 (13)
(11) AUTO ACK AUTO CH: ENA (13R)
LAT: 34 45’ N 10:45 UTC (14) LAT : 34 45.1111’ N 12:12
(12) (12) (14)
LON: 135 45’ E AUTO (15) LON : 135 45.1111’ E UTC
(16R) MMSI 432456789 AUTO (15)

Fig. 1.2.1 FM-8800S/D Operation Panel

(1) INTL SHIFT (7) (1) INTL SHIFT (7)

(2) (2)

(3) (6)
(4) (10)

(5) (9)
Hi
Rx SCAN

DUP
16 (8)
(3) (6)
(4) (10)

(5) (9)
Hi
Rx SCAN

DUP
16 (8)

(11) AUTO ACK 1 (16) (11) AUTO ACK 1 (18R)


(17) VOL5 SQA (18) (20R) VOL5 SQA (19R)

(13) WATCH CH70


(13) AUTO CH : ENA
LAT: 34 45’ N
(12) LAT: 34
LON: 135 45’ E
(12) 11.1111’N
(14) 10:45 UTC LON: 135
(15) AUTO 11.1111’E
(14) 10:45 UTC
(15) AUTO

INTL Ver. Russian Ver.

Fig. 1.2.2 Remote Handset Operation Panel

1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Operation

1.2.2 LCD display and Operation


The following item numbers in Table 1.2.1 are the number displayed on LCD in the
previous page. The same display is shown while operating Transceiver unit and Remote
Handset. [SHIFT] selection must be made in 3 seconds. After 3 seconds, “SHIFT”
indication on the LCD display disappears.

LCD dimmer adjustment: [SHIFT] -> [2]


LCD contrast adjustment: [SHIFT] -> [SHIFT], [LOG] or CHANNEL knob

As for the number of the item which "R" is added, the program is Russian Ver.
Table 1.2.1 Operation

Item Indication Operation key Outline


Indicates an active mode
INTL, USA, NOTE:
WX, CANADA, 1. Indicated according to a setup
1 [SHIFT]->[7: INTL/USA]
INLND-WA, [MENU]->SYSTEM->CH MODE
PRIV, MEMO x 2. “MEMO x” is indicated when a setup is made
[MENU]->MEMORY CHANNEL.
ON/OFF setting for SP manually
SP mark
2 [SHIFT]->[1: SP mark] NOTE:
(ON/OFF)
[MENU]->VOLUME->OFFHOOK SPKR setting
Hi: 25W, Lo: 1W
NOTE:
1. Indicated a mode channel allowed by
[MENU]->SYSTEM->CH MODE according to
the power setting in [MENU]->SYSTEM->CH
3 Hi, Lo [SHIFT]->[0: HI/LO]
CONFIG
2. Output adjustment in [MENU]->SYSTEM->TX
POWER
*Even if SWR worse or PA heat protection is
activated, it continues current “Hi or Lo” indication.
PTT ON: Rx, Rx indication show when signal is being received.
4 Rx, Tx
PTT OFF: Tx Tx will be indicated if TX RF signal is detected.
Bar indicates SINAD which is Rx signal
0: No signals
ANT mark PTT ON: OFF,
5 1: Less than 20 dB SINAD
(Display Bar: x3) PTT OFF: ON
2: 20 to 40 dB SINAD
3: More than 40 dB SINAD
Indicated when there are unread messages in DSC
Envelope mark Rx message log.
6
(ON/OFF) NOTE:
[LOG]->RCVD ORDINARY, RCVD DISTRESS
SHIFT
7 [SHIFT] Indicated when SHIFT function is available
(ON/OFF)
CH In PRIV channel, indicates in a maximum of 3
8
(Max. 3 digits) digits.

Cont’d

1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Operation

Item Indication Operation key Outline


Indicates “DUP” when selecting DUP channel
NOTE:
DUP Indicates a mode channel allowed by
9
(ON/OFF) [MENU]->SYSTEM->CH MODE according to
the power setting in [MENU]->SYSTEM->CH
CONFIG
Indicates the operational SCAN or DW mode.
DUAL: [SHIFT]->[9: DW]
10 SCAN, DUAL When operating SCAN or DW, the channel
SCAN: [SHIFT]->[8: SCAN]
indication also changes.
1. ACK:
AUTO ACK,
When receiving ACK RQ message from DSC by
MANUAL
ROUTINE, indicates the setting whether ACK
ACK
BQ is transmitted by AUTO or MANUAL.
Transceiver
11 [SHIFT]->[5: ACK] 2. DISTRESS MODE:
DISTRESS
Indicates after transmitting Distress Alert
MODE
NOTE:
Handset
Setting COMPLY STATUS in [MENU]->AUTO
DIST. MODE
ACK
Indicates Latitude/Longitude
NOTE:
1. AUTO/MANUAL is selected by
[MENU]->POSITION, but MANUAL input is
12 LAT/LON not available valid Pos. data is inputted from the
GPS.
2. [MENU]->ALARM->POSITION OLDER sets
up output interval of alarm indicating the updated
Pos. data.
Indicates that WATCH CH70 is executed on the
CH70 RX board.
13 WATCH CH70 *As for the transceiver unit, WATCH CH70
indication changes to DISTRESS MODE after
transmitting Distress Alert.
The state of AUTO ACK is set to ON and
ON-HOOK.
When received the INDVIDUAL/ROUTINE call,
13R AUTO CH Communication CH changes automatically after
returning AUTO ACK.
(ENA: Auto change, DIS: Manual change)
[MENU] -> AUTO CH
Indicates UTC
NOTE:
1. Input selection of AUTO/MANUAL in
14 xx : xx UTC
[MENU]->POSITION, but MANUAL input is
not available when valid Pos. data is inputted
from the GPS.
Indication of inputted Pos./Time
NOTE:
AUTO, Input selection of AUTO/MANUAL in
15
MANUAL [MENU]->POSITION, but MANUAL input is
not available when valid Pos. data is inputted
from the GPS.

1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Operation

Indicates Remote Handset number


NOTE:
16
1-4 Turn on the power while pressing Remote
18R
Handset [MENU] key to set, and set Remote
Handset ID number.

Display registered MMSI on [MENU] -> System ->


16R MMSI
Self-ID

17
20R
VOL 0-10 VOL: [SHIFT]->[ ↑ ], [ ↓ ] VOL: SP volume adjustments for Remote Handset
YEAR/DATE/TIME used to Time stamp of LOG
are displayed.
17R Year/Day/Time
ZDA>RMC>auto data is displayed. In case of
Manual input, set in the [MENU] -> RTC.
SQA: [SHIFT]->[SQ auto]
18 - SQA: Indicates when SQ Auto is set up.
SQA, SQ 0-10 SQ 0-10:
19R - SQ 0-10: Indicates when SQ is set up manually.
[SHIFT]->[SQ]->[>], [<]

DISTRESS MODE (DIST. MODE) is:


This mode is displayed after transmitting Distress Alert by Transceiver unit or
Remote station (Handset). In this mode setting, voice communication through
Transceiver unit and Remote station is equally prioritized. For example, even if the
Remote Handset side is OFF-HOOK, “OCCUPIDE xxxx” is not shown in
Transceiver unit. This state continues until the power is turned off.
Also, when the program is Russian Ver., it is continued until the power is OFF or
until it continues pressing the [CANCEL] key 3 seconds or more.

Unavailable functions by DISTRESS MODE are as below.


- [FILE] key operation
- [MENU] key operation
- Edit and call the DSC messages by [CALL] key operation
- [SHIFT] -> Intercom function of [4:IntCom]
- [SHIFT] -> Operation for changing ACK of [5: ACK]
- [SHIFT] -> Operation for printing [6: Print]
- SQ and AF Volume of Remote Handset cannot be adjusted. SQ control depends
on Transceiver SQ control.

1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 Operation

ALARM Display
Table 1.2.2 Alarm Display

LED
Conditions Alarm sounds How to stop
conditions
While pressing [Distress] 2200 Hz and 0 Hz
button for 3 seconds (125 ms)
During the transmission of Red:
2200 Hz continuous sound
Distress Alert continuous light Press
After the transmission of [CANCEL] key.
Distress Alert
1300 Hz and 2200 Hz
Receiving Distress Alert Red: blink
(250 ms)
1300 Hz and 2200 Hz
Receiving Urgency Call Green: blink
(250 ms)
1300 Hz and 0 Hz
Receiving Safety Call Green: blink Stops
(250 ms)
automatically
Receiving Ship Business Call Green: blink 880 Hz and 440 Hz
after 2 minutes
Receiving Routine Call Green: blink (500 ms)
or press
750 Hz and 650 Hz [CANCEL] key.
(50 ms)
Receiving PSTN Call Green: blink
Repeat 10 times and OFF
1 second

Russian Ver.
The alarm sound level when receiving the DSC message increases in 4 steps.
In case of ROUTINE, alarm sound is sounded 3 times, and it increases in 4 steps. In
case of SAFETY, URGENCY, DISTRESS, alarm sound is sounded 4 times, and it
increases in 4 steps.

1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 2. Location of2.1Parts
Main Unit

2.1 Main Unit


2.1.1 Panel

265 mm

3 W/4 ohm SP
110 mm

Handset: HS-2003

AF Gain/Power SW SQ VR/Auto SQ SW CH SW/Enter SW

Photo 2.1.1 FM-8800S/D Front Panel

GND

TR ANT
+24 VDC IN

CH 70 ANT

Printer port (PP-510) IEC61162-1/Remote port EXT SP


Protect OFF:
Jumper between #2 and #15 3 W/4 ohm
Max.: 5 W

Photo 2.1.2 FM-8800S/D, Rear Panel

2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

2.1.2 Interior

285 mm

CPU
(FM-8800D)
DUP Rx

CH 70 Rx

Photo 2.1.3 FM-8800S/D, Bottom Shield

PWR

Tx/Rx

Photo 2.1.4 FM-8800S, Top Shield

2-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

PWR

Duplexer
(CDH_156_10_06A)

Photo 2.1.5 FM-8800D, Top View

PWR
(05P0776)

Duplexer

Tx/Rx
(05P0774B)

Photo 2.1.6 FM-8800D, Open View

2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

写真 2.1.7 FM-8800S 下面

写真 2.1.8 FM-8800D下面
CPU
(05P0773)

CH70 Rx
(05P0775)

Photo 2.1.7 FM-8800S, Bottom View

CPU
(05P0773)

DUP Rx
(05P0777)
CH70 Rx
(05P0775)

Photo 2.1.8 FM-8800D, Bottom View

2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

RTC(05P0804)

Russian Ver.

Photo 2.1.9 FM-8800S, D Front Panel removed

J14
(Connect to RTC board)

Russian Ver.

Photo 2.1.10 FM-8800S, D For RTC board connector:J14 on CPU board

2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

写真 2.1.9 FM-8800S 上面
PWR
(05P0776)

PANEL
(05P0772)

Tx/Rx
(05P0774A)

Photo 2.1.11 FM-8800S, Open View

CR5 (Remains of Key Back Light LED)


3 W/4 ohm SP

PANEL
(05P0772)

Photo 2.1.12 FM-8800S/D, Panel

2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

2.1.3 Board

J15 (Handset OFF) U30 (H8S CPU)


U36 (LCD CONT)

TP1 (38.4 MHz)

[Printer]: 25 pin
Y1 (TCXO: 25.6 MHz)

TP2 (25.6 MHz)

[IEC61162-1/Remote]: 37 pin
J13 (REF OSC: 25.6 MHz)
J3 (DUP REF: 25.6 MHz)
J11 (CH70 OSC 38.4 MHz)
J9 (Tx MIX: 45 MHz out)

Photo 2.1.13 CPU (05P0773), A side


SP

J5 (Wing MIC sel.)


2
U20 (DSP) U29 (E ROM) U31 (RAM)

RT1: (+15 VDC Line)


RUE900

Photo 2.1.14 CPU (05P0773), B side

U12 (AF AMP) TDA2003H


2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

PA (RA35H1516M) Jumper
Between J1 and 2

J3 (ANT)
J5
(CH70 ANT and TR
TP1 ANT: common use)
(Rx 1st Lo: F+51.2375 MHz)

TP4 TP2
(Rx 2nd Lo: 51.2 MHz) (PLL VCO CONT)
J8
J7 (Tx MIX 45 MHz) (REF OSC: 25.6 MHz)

U13 (Temperature sensor)

Photo 2.1.15 FM-8800S: Tx/Rx (05P0774A)

J1 (DUP OUT)
J2 (DUP IN1)
PA (RA35H1516M)

J4 (DUP IN2)

J3 (ANT)
- Tx/Rx (05P0774A)
J1, 2, 4 NO

- Tx/Rx (05P0774B)
J1, 2, 4 YES

* Shield cover removed

Photo 2.1.16 FM-8800D: Tx/Rx (05P0774B)

2-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

J2 (DUP REF: 25.6 MHz) TP3 (2nd Lo: 51.2 MHz)


TP4 (1st Lo VCO CONT)

J1 (ANT) TP1 (1st Lo: F+51.2375 MHz)

Photo 2.1.17 FM-8800D: DUP Rx (05P0777)

J2 (ANT) TP1 (1st Lo: 118.1625 MHz)

TP4 (2nd Lo: 38.4 MHz)


J1 (CH70 OSC: 38.4 MHz)

Photo 2.1.18 CH70 Rx (05P0775)

2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

+15 VDC out

J1
#1 to #3: +15 VDC
#4: PWR SW P
#5: PWR SW M
#6 to #8: 0 V

Photo 2.1.19 PWR (05P0776), A side

DC-DC Converter:
CBS2002415 T

Photo 2.1.20 PWR (05P0776), B side

2-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

LCD p.c.b

Photo 2.1.21 PANEL (05P0772), A side

Photo 2.1.22 PANEL (05P0772), B side

2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.1 Main Unit

Russian Ver.

Photo 2.1.23 RTC board (05P0804)

2-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.2 Handset/Remote

2.2 Handset/Remote
2.2.1 HS-2003

Condenser MIC Ear SP


(1.5 mW/150 ohm)
(-49 dBm/1.6 k ohm)

05P0780

PTT SW Hanger
H=57 mm
L=208 mm
W=65 mm

Magnet

Hanger

Photo 2.2.1 Handset (HS-2003)

2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.2 Handset/Remote

2.2.2 RB-8800/HS-8800

HS-8800
H=77 mm
L=208 mm
W=140 mm
SP (0.5 W/8 ohm)
RB-8800

Photo 2.2.2 RB-8800/HS-8800

3 W/4 ohm SP
Max. 5 W

05P0782

TB1
05P0779
TB2

TB1 and TB2 are


connected in parallel.

TB3 (GND)

Photo 2.2.3 RB-8800, Open view

2-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.2 Handset/Remote

2.2.3 RB-8810/HS-8800

Handset: HS-8800

Hanger: RB-8810 0.4 W/8 ohm SP


Hanger
H=57 mm
L=208 mm
W=65 mm

05P0798

Photo 2.2.4 RB-8810/HS-8800

2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.2 Handset/Remote

Condenser MIC Ear SP


(-49 dBm/1.6 k ohm) (1.5 mW/150 ohm)

U2 CPU

PTT SW 05P0781 B side

05P0781 A side LCD

05P0715 A side

E2ROM

LCD p.c.b

05P0715 B side

Photo 2.2.5 HS-8800

2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.3Junction Box/DMC IF

2.3 Junction Box/DMC IF


2.3.1 Junction Box: IF-8810

H=40 mm
L=150 mm
W=290 mm

Outer size of IF-8810


and DMC IF is the
same.

05P0790

Photo 2.3.1 Junction Box

2-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.3Junction Box/DMC IF

2.3.2 DMC IF: IF-8820

U1: CPU

05P0778

TP2: GND

TP1: CPU CK
(18.432 MHz)

AD0: Not used

AD1: Not used


J4: Termination

Photo 2.3.2 DMC I/F

2-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.4 VHF Console: RC-8800

2.4 VHF Console: RC-8800

330

190

500
IF-8810

Printer
(μTP-80F)

Photo 2.4.1 VHF Console Photo 2.4.2 Front cover, Open view

Printer I/F: 05P0541


Power terminal
board

Photo 2.4.3 IF-8810, Open view Photo 2.4.4 Printer, Open view

2-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.5 Printer: PP-8800

2.5 Printer: PP-8800

200

180

Installed μTP-80F
110
140

240 Printer Connector +24 VDC

Photo 2.5.1 PP-8800 Photo 2.5.2 PP-8800, Rear panel

Printer I/F: 05P0541

Photo 2.5.3 Cover, Open view Photo 2.5.4 Pulled out μTP-80F

Printer Power supply


+5 VDC/6 A Power supply
(DC-DC Converter: HGE05006)

Photo 2.5.5 Printer I/F: 05P0541

2-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 3. 3.1Menu
Main Menu Tree
List(INTL Ver.)

3.1 Main Menu List (Program: INTL Ver. 0550215-02/03.xx)

3.1.1 User menu


To call the below menus, press [MENU] key.
Table 3.1.1 User Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


4H
3H
POSITION
2H
OLDER
1H
0.5 H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON Fixed on “ON”
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
STATUS UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
UNABLE Selects when COMPLY STATUS is
EQUIP DISBLD
REASON UNABLE
AUTO ACK MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL
POSITION ON
CALL OFF
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD
ORDINARY
RCVD
ERASE LOG
DISTRESS
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
USA
MEMORY WX 50 entry
CHANNEL CANADA
INLND-WA Indicates when entering ATIS ID
ERASE
COAST CALL
SHIP CALL
MESSAGE For editing message of each CALL
100 entry GROUP CALL
FILE ENTRY type (Refer to the DSC Call menu.)
PSTN CALL
AREA CALL
AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME

Cont’d

3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.1 Main Menu List(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE
9 (8 to 16)
LEVEL
VOLUME INTERCOM It can be set up independently of
8 (1 to 16)
VOLUME Remote Handset.
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
Only for checking MMSI
SELF ID e.g. 432456789
Refer to the next page for set up.
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID
message recorded in MESSAGE
LIST
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] -> [4:IntCom],
1: Handset 1
SYSTEM INTERCOM the recorded name in the left box is
2: Handset 2
NAMING indicated to recognize the caller side
3: Handset 3
easily.
4: Handset 4
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550215-xx
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.
SYSTEM
(Option Password and Jumper setting are necessary to enter the next menu. See 4.1 for details.
menu)

3-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.1 Main Menu List(INTL Ver.)

3.1.2 Option menu


As for Option menus, call up by the procedure of page 4-1.

Table 3.1.2 System Menu List

System menu 1 2 3 Note


ID ENTRY
SELF ID
ID CLEAR
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID LIST message recorded in MESSAGE
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] ->
1: Handset 1
INTERCOM [4:IntCom], the recorded names
2: Handset 2
NAMING in the left box are displayed to
3: Handset 3
recognize the caller side easily.
4: Handset 4
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550215-xx
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.
ON
AUTO 1W
OFF
ON
AUTO REVERT
OFF
ID ENTRY xxxxxxxxx
ID CLEAR
ATIS ID
RIVER
AREA Selectable by recording ATIS ID.
RIVER & SEA
CH70 BOARD CH70 BOARD No function
INTL
USA
WX
MODE
CANADA
INLND-WA
Switch by pressing [1] or [2] key.
PRIV
When pressing [CANCEL] key,
CHANNEL XX
CH CONFIG “TURN OFF/ON” is displayed.
TX ENABLE
And then, turn off the power to
TRX RX ENABLE record.
UNABLE
DUP
DUP/SIMP
SIMP
HI
TX POWER
LOW

Cont’d

3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.1 Main Menu List(INTL Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


ON
INTL
OFF
ON
USA/WX
OFF
ON
CH MODE CANADA
OFF
ON Switch ON/OFF by entering
INLND
OFF ATIS ID.
ON
PRIV
OFF
ON
SCAN
OFF
SCAN/DW
ON
DW
OFF
ON Effective for FM-8800D,
SP MUTE Set up ON/OFF for SP at the
OFF
time of Duplex operation.
ON
TIMEOUT TIMER Effective for USA channel
OFF
HI 127 (0 to 255)
TX POWER LOW 127 (0 to 255)
TEMP. REDUCE 127 (0 to 255)
HI Select HI power or LOW
POWER HI power, and test by the selected
LOW
power.
Select DSC or ATIS, and test
DSC or ATIS
TONE TEST by the selected mode.
MARK
SPACE
Output by PTT ON
DOT
CARRIER
INTL
REGULATION
RUSSIAN
1 No function
REMOTE ID
2 1: Master 2: Slave
VDR OUTPUT
8 (1 to 16)
LEVEL
ON Enter the password: 652111
EEROM NO CLEAR
PROTECTED OFF MMSI CLEAR
ALL CLEAR
** DSC RX TEST **
T/A ”OUTPUT RX DSC DATA TO
NMEA PORT”

Cont’d

3-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.1 Main Menu List(INTL Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


FSK LOOP
REMOTE
LOOP TEST LOOP
NMEA
LOOP
ALL “ALL” is automatically
RAM executed. And then, RAM,
CPU MEMORY TEST
ROM ROM and EEPROM are
EEPROM checked.
Prints out
PRINTER
“FM-8800 PRINTER TEST”.
The detailed version is
FM-8800:
PROG. VER. displayed after pressing [Shift]
0550215-xx
-> [1] key 5 times.
LCD TEST
BACK LIGHT 1 1 to 4
KEY
CH
PANEL
VOL
UI TEST User Interface Test
SQ
PTT
HOOK
AGC Test
AGC No function
TEST out
CH70 RX
LOOP
Loop Back Test
P: 0 /A: 9066
155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, used in a factory.
165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC
out
APC No function
CH
DUP/SIMP
xx
RX IF
LEVEL
TX/RX
RX AF
NOISE
CH70 RX IF
STATUS
LEVEL Monitor the selected state by
CH70 RX “CH DUP/SIMP xx” channel.
AF NOISE
PLL1 UL
LEVEL
PLL2 UL
LEVEL
EXIT: ENT

Cont’d

3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.1 Main Menu List(INTL Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, use in a factory.
DUP RX 165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC No function
out
TEST DDS
P: 100 / A: 19655
4528 L Input/Output Test
DDS/CODEC
P: 100 / A: 19962 for CODEC and DDS
4528 R
P: 100 / A: 19803
SHIP
STATION TYPE Not to be changed.
COAST
RESET DSP

3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 DSC Call Menu(INTL Ver.)

3.2 DSC Call Menu (Program: INTL Ver. 0550215-02/03.xx)

To call DSC CALL message menus as below, press [CALL/MSG] key.

Table 3.2.1 DSC Call Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


COAST ID 00________
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Select Category
Category SAFETY
URGENCY
DISTRESS
SIMPLEX TP
DUPLEX TP
TCmd1
DATA
FAX
COAST NO INFO
CALL V.21
V.22
V.22 bis
TCmd2 V.23
When selecting DATA by the TCmd1
V.26 bis
V.26 ter
V.27 ter
V.32
Selects CH from the list according to
SELECT CH
CH the TCmd1.
NO INFO
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
DISTRESS
SIMPLEX TP
DUPLEX TP
TCmd1
DATA
FAX
SHIP CALL NO INFO
V.21
V.22
V.22 bis
TCmd2 V.23
When selecting DATA by the TCmd1
V.26 bis
V.26 ter
V.27 ter
V.32
Selects CH from the list according to
SELECT CH
CH the TCmd1.
NO INFO

Cont’d

3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 DSC Call Menu(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


GROUP ID 0xxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Select Category
Category SAFETY
URGENCY
DISTRESS
SIMPLEX TP
DUPLEX TP
TCmd1
DATA
FAX
GROUP NO INFO
CALL V.21
V.22
V.22 bis
TCmd2 V.23
When selecting DATA by the TCmd1
V.26 bis
V.26 ter
V.27 ter
V.32
Selects CH from the list according to
SELECT CH
CH the TCmd1.
NO INFO
COAST ID 00xxxxxx
SIMPLEX TP
TCmd1
PSTN CALL DUPLEX TP
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
TEL xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Max. 16 digits
SAFETY
Category URGENCY Select Category
DISTRESS
SIMPLEX TP
DUPLEX TP
TCmd1
DATA
FAX
NO INFO
V.21
ALL SHIPS V.22
V.22 bis
TCmd2 V.23
When selecting DATA by the TCmd1
V.26 bis
V.26 ter
V.27 ter
V.32
Selects CH from the list according to
SELECT CH xx
CH the TCmd1.
NO INFO

Cont’d

3-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 DSC Call Menu(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


AREA N/E, S/W Designates coordinate
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
DISTRESS
SIMPLEX TP
DUPLEX TP
TCmd1
DATA
FAX
AREA
NO INFO
CALL
V.21
V.22
V.22 bis
TCmd2 V.23
When selecting DATA by the TCmd1
V.26 bis
V.26 ter
V.27 ter
V.32
SELECT CH xx
CH
NO INFO
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Category SAFETY Select Category
POSITION URGENCY
DISTRESS
POSITION
TCmd1 Fixed on “POSITION REQUEST”
REQUEST
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
BUSINESS
Category SAFETY Select Category
POLLING
URGENCY
DISTRESS
TCmd1 POLLING Fixed on “POLLING”
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
URGENCY
Category Select Category
SAFETY
NEUTRAL TCmd1 SIMPLEX TP Fixed on “SIMPLEX TP”
TCmd2 NEUTRAL CRAFT Fixed on “NEUTRAL CRAFT”
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16”

Cont’d

3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 DSC Call Menu(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


Category URGENCY Fixed on “URGENCY”
TCmd1 SIMPLEX TP Fixed on “SIMPLEX TP”
MEDICAL
TCmd2 MEDICAL TRSPRT Fixed on “MEDICAL TRSPRT”
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16”
xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
TCmd DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
Sinking
RELAY ALL
Disabled & Adr
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
SIMP TP Fixed on “CH16”
COAST ID 00xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
TCmd DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
RELAY SEL Sinking
Disabled & Adr
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
SIMP TP Fixed on “CH16”

Cont’d

3-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.2 DSC Call Menu(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


UNDESIGNATED Default
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
NATURE Listing
Sinking
Disabled & Adr
DISTRESS
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
SIMP TP Fixed on “CH16”

3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3 Remote Handset Menu(INTL Ver.)

3.3 Remote Handset Menu (Program: INTL Ver. 0550216-02.xx)


To call the below menus, press [MENU] key.
Setting values in Remote Handset [MENU] and FM-8800S/D [MENU] are the same,
and the way of setting also. DSC Call menu from Remote Handset is the same as “3.2
DSC Call menu.”

Table 3.3.1 Remote Handset Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


4H
3H
POSTION
2H
OLDER
1H
0.5 H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON Fixed on “ON”
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
STATUS UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
UNABLE Selectable when COMPLY STATUS
EQUIP DISBLD
REASON is UNABLE
AUTO ACK MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL
POSITION ON
CALL OFF
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD
ORDINARY
RCVD
ERASE LOG
DISTRESS
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
USA
MEMORY WX 50 entry
CH CANADA
INLND-WA Indicates when entering ATIS ID
ERASE
COAST CALL
SHIP CALL
MESSAGE For editing message of each CALL
100 entry GROUP CALL
FILE type (Refer to the DSC Call menu.)
PSTN CALL
AREA CALL

Cont’d

3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.3 Remote Handset Menu(INTL Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME
AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE
9 (8 to 16)
LEVEL
VOLUME INTERCOM
8 (1 to 16)
VOLUME
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
Checks only MMSI
SELF ID e.g. 432456789
Transceiver unit executes the setting.
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID
message recorded in MESSAGE
LIST
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
By pressing [Shift] -> [4:IntCom],
SYSTEM INTERCOM the recorded name in the left box
NAMING are displayed to find the other side
easily.
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
same version.

Alternative Operations
- Turn on the power while pressing [MENU] key.
Set the ID number for Handset
(See Chapter 4 System Setting for details.)
- Turn on the power while pressing [TEST] key.
Test mode of Handset
(See Chapter 8 Maintenance for details.)
- Adjustment of Dimmer
[SHIFT] -> [2]
- Adjustment of Contrast
[SHIFT] -> [SHIFT], [LOG] or CHANNEL knob

3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

3.4 Main Menu List (Program: Russian Ver. 0550220-01.xx)

3.4.1 User menu


To call the below menus, press [MENU] key.

Table 3.4.1 User Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


4H
3H
POSITION
2H
OLDER
1H
0.5H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON Fixed on “ON”
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
STATUS UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
UNABLE Selects when COMPLY STATUS is
EQUIP DISBLD
REASON UNABLE
AUTO ACK MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL
POSITION ON
CALL OFF
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD
ORDINARY
ERASE xxxx
RCVD
ERASE LOG ARE YOU SURE?
DISTRESS
YES NO
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
USA
MEMORY WX 50 entry
CHANNEL CANADA
INLND-WA Indicates when entering ATIS ID
ERASE
COAST CALL
MESSAGE SHIP CALL For editing message of each CALL
100 entry
FILE ENTRY GROUP CALL type (Refer to the DSC Call menu.)
PSTN CALL
AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME

Cont’d

3-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


DATE 2006-03-27 Time stamp of Communication LOG
RTC
TIME 06:32:55 ZDA>RMC>Manual
AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE
9 (8 to 16)
LEVEL
VOLUME INTERCOM It can be set up independently of
8 (1 to 16)
VOLUME Remote Handset.
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
ENABLE The state of AUTO ACK is set to
ON and ON-HOOK.
When received the
INDVIDUAL/ROUTINE call,
AUTO CH AUTO CH Communication CH changes
DISABLE
automatically after returning AUTO
ACK.
- ENABLE: Auto change,
- DISABLE: Manual change
When not specifying TEL CH from
COAST with PSTN CALL of from
PSTN CH PSTN CH 00 COAST to SHIP, assign the CH,
which is set in this time, to ACK
BQ message.
NEUTRAL ABLE When setting ABLE, NEUTRAL
SPECIAL CALL UNABLE CALL and MEDICAL CALL in
CALL ABLE SPECIAL menu of CALL TYPE for
MEDICAL CALL
UNABLE DSC are selectable.
Only for checking MMSI
SELF ID e.g. 432456789
Refer to the next page for set up.
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID
message recorded in MESSAGE
LIST
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] -> [4:IntCom],
1: Handset 1
SYSTEM INTERCOM the recorded name in the left box is
2: Handset 2
NAMING indicated to recognize the caller side
3: Handset 3
easily.
4: Handset 4
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550220-01
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.
SYSTEM
(Option Password and Jumper setting are necessary to enter the next menu. See 4.1 for details.
menu)

3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

3.4.2 Option menu (Program: Russian Ver. 0550220-01.xx)


As for Option menus, call up by the procedure of page 4-1.

Table 3.4.2 System Menu List

System menu 1 2 3 Note


ID ENTRY
SELF ID
ID CLEAR
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
message recorded in
GROUP ID LIST
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY
menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800 By pressing [Shift] ->
1: Handset 1 [4:IntCom], the recorded
INTERCOM
2: Handset 2 names in the left box are
NAMING
3: Handset 3 displayed to recognize the
4: Handset 4 caller side easily.
-DUP Rx board (Yes):
FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM -DUP Rx board (No):
0550220-01
VERSION FM8800S
EXT: ENT
FM-8800D and FM-8800S are
the same version.
ON
AUTO 1W
OFF
ON
AUTO REVERT
OFF
ID ENTRY xxxxxxxxx
ID CLEAR
ATIS ID
RIVER Selectable by recording ATIS
AREA
RIVER & SEA ID.
CH70 BOARD CH70 BOARD No function
INTL
USA
WX
MODE
CANADA
INLND-WA Switch by pressing [1] or [2]
PRIV key. When pressing
CHANNEL XX [CANCEL] key, “TURN
CH CONFIG
TX ENABLE OFF/ON” is displayed.
TRX RX ENABLE And then, turn off the power to
UNABLE record.
DUP
DUP/SIMP
SIMP
HI
TX POWER
LOW

Cont’d

3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


ON
INTL
OFF
ON
USA/WX
OFF
ON
CH MODE CANADA
OFF
ON Switch ON/OFF by entering
INLND
OFF ATIS ID.
ON
PRIV
OFF
ON
SCAN
OFF
SCAN/DW
ON
DW
OFF
ON Effective for FM-8800D,
SP MUTE Set up ON/OFF for SP at the
OFF
time of Duplex operation.
ON
TIMEOUT TIMER Effective for USA channel
OFF
HI 170(0 - 255)
TX POWER LOW 44(0 - 255)
TEMP. REDUCE 134(0 - 255)
HI Select HI power or LOW
POWER HI power, and test by the selected
LOW
power.
Select DSC or ATIS, and test
DSC or ATIS
TONE TEST by the selected mode.
MARK
SPACE
Output by PTT ON
DOT
CARRIER
INTL
REGULATION Should be set RUSSIAN
RUSSIAN
1 No function
REMOTE ID
2 1: Master 2: Slave
VDR OUTPUT
8 (1 to 16)
LEVEL
ON Enter the password: 652111
EEROM NO CLEAR
PROTECTED OFF MMSI CLEAR
ALL CLEAR
** DSC RX TEST **
T/A 「OUTPUT RX DSC DATA TO
NMEA PORT」

Cont’d

3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


FSK LOOP
REMOTE
LOOP TEST LOOP
NMEA
LOOP
ALL “ALL” is automatically
RAM executed. And then, RAM,
CPU MEMORY TEST
ROM ROM and EEPROM are
EEPROM checked.
Prints out
PRINTER
“FM-8800 PRINTER TEST”.
The detailed version is
FM-8800:
PROG. VER. displayed after pressing [Shift]
0550220-01
-> [1] key 5 times.
LCD TEST
BACK LIGHT 1 1-4
KEY
CH
PANEL
VOL
UI TEST User Interface Test
SQ
PTT
HOOK
AGC Test
AGC No function
TEST out
CH70 RX
LOOP
Loop Back Test
P: 0 /A: 9066
155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, used in a factory.
165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC
out
APC No function
CH
DUP/SIMP
xx
RX IF
LEVEL
TX/RX
RX AF
NOISE
CH70 RX IF
STATUS
LEVEL Monitor the selected state by
CH70 RX “CH DUP/SIMP xx” channel.
AF NOISE
PLL1 UL
LEVEL
PLL2 UL
LEVEL
EXIT: ENT

Cont’d

3-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.4 Main Menu List (Russian Ver.)

System menu 1 2 3 Note


155.00 MHz
To set the frequency data of
PLL 160.00 MHz
PLL circuit, use in a factory.
DUP RX 165.00 MHz
AGC Test
AGC No function
out
TEST DDS
P: 100 / A: 19655
4528 L Input/Output Test
DDS/CODEC
P: 100 / A: 19962 for CODEC and DDS
4528 R
P: 100 / A: 19803
SHIP
STATION TYPE Not to be changed.
COAST
RESET DSP
M943-11 When setting to M943-11,
TCmd1, TCmd2 of RX
COMPATIBLE message is checked. If it is
M943-10 TCmd which is not defined as
M943-11, it does not receive,

3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.5 DSC Call Menu (Russian Ver.)

3.5 DSC Call Menu (Program: Russian Ver. 0550220-01.xx)

To call DSC CALL message menus as below, press [CALL/MSG] key.

Table 3.5.1 DSC Call Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


COAST ID 00________
ROUTINE
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
TELEPHONE When the category is SAFETY or
TCmd1
DATA URGENCY, TELEPHONE is fixed.
TCmd2 NO INFO
COAST - When the category is Safety, CH is
CALL selected from CH list when selecting
SELECT CH. Also, the optional CH
can be inputted when selecting
CH NO INFO MANUAL.
- When the category is URGENCY,
CH16 is fixed.
- When the category is ROUTINE, NO
INFO is fixed.
EOS RQ Fixed on “RQ”
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
ROUTINE
Category SAFETY Select Category
URGENCY
TELEPHONE When the category is SAFETY or
TCmd1
DATA URGENCY, TELEPHONE is fixed.
TCmd2 NO INFO
- When the category is ROUTINE,
SHIP CALL SELECT CH SAFETY, CH is selected from
SIMP-CH list when selecting
SELECT CH. Also, the optional
CH CH can be inputted when selecting
MANUAL.
MANUAL
- When the category is URGENCY,
CH16 is fixed. Also, Non-MANUAL
display.
EOS RQ Fixed on “RQ”
GROUP ID 0xxxxxxxx
TCmd1 TELEPHONE Fixed on “ TELEPHONE”
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “ NO INFO”
GROUP When selecting SELECT CH, CH is
CALL SELECT CH selected from SIMP-CH list. Also, the
CH
optional CH can be inputted when
NO INFO selecting MANUAL.
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”

Cont’d

3-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.5 DSC Call Menu (Russian Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


COAST ID 00xxxxxx
ALLMODES TP
Specify the CH setting by [MENU] ->
TCmd1 DUPLEX TP
PSTN CH.
PSTN CALL DATA
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
TEL xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Max. 16 digits
EOS RQ
SAFETY
Category
URGENCY
TCmd1 TELEPHONE Fixed on “ TELEPHONE”
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
- When the category is SAFETY, CH is
selected from SIMP-CH list when
ALL SHIPS SELECT CH xx selecting SELECT CH. Also, the
optional CH can be inputted when
CH
selecting MANUAL.
- When the category is URGENCY,
MANUAL CH16 is fixed. Also, Non-MANUAL
display.
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”
SHIP ID xxxxxxxxx
Category SAFETY Fixed on “SAFETY”
POSITION
POSITION TCmd1 Fixed on “POSITION REQUEST ”
REQUEST
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
EOS RQ Fixed on “RQ”
STATION ID xxxxxxxxx
Category SAFETY Fixed on “SAFETY”
TEST TCmd1 TEST Fixed on “TEST”
TCmd2 NO INFO Fixed on “NO INFO”
EOS RQ Fixed on “RQ”

Cont’d

3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.5 DSC Call Menu (Russian Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
TCmd DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “ DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
Sinking
RELAY ALL Disabled & Adr
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual input
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”
COAST ID 00xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
ID IN DIST
(NO INFO)
TCmd DISTRESS RELAY Fixed on “ DISTRESS RELAY”
UNDESIGNATED
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
Listing
NATURE
RELAY SEL Sinking
Disabled & Adr
Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
EPIRB
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual input
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE Fixed on “CH16”
EOS RQ Fixed on “RQ”

Cont’d

3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.5 DSC Call Menu (Russian Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


NEUTRAL CRAFT Fixed on “NEUTRAL CRAFT”
Category URGENCY Fixed on “URGENCY”
TCmd1 TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
TCmd2 Fixed on “NEUTRAL CRAFT”
CRAFT
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16”
SPECIAL EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”
NOTE)
MEDICAL
Fixed on “MEDICAL TRANSPORT”
TRANSPORT
Category URGENCY Fixed on “URGENCY”
TCmd1 TELEPHONE Fixed on “TELEPHONE”
MEDICAL
MEDICAL
TCmd2 Fixed on “MEDICAL TRANSPORT”
TRANSPORT
CH CH16 Fixed on “CH16”
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”
UNDESIGNATED Default
Fire
Flooding
Collision
Grounding
NATURE Listing
Sinking
Disabled & Adr
DISTRESS Abandoning
Piracy
Man over board
AUTO GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
POS MANUAL Time/Pos.: Manual
NO INFO Time/Pos.: NO INFO
AT xx;xx Time for Pos.
TELEPHONE
EOS EOS Fixed on “EOS”

Note;
When setting NEUTRAL, MEDICAL of [MENU] -> SPACIAL CALL to ABLE, these
menus can be opened.

3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.6 Remote Handset Menu(Russian Ver.)

3.6 Remote Handset Menu (Program: Russian Ver. 0550221-01.xx)


To call the below menus, press [MENU] key.
Setting values in Remote Handset [MENU] and FM-8800S/D [MENU] are the same,
and the way of setting also. DSC Call menu from Remote Handset is the same as “3.5
DSC Call menu.”

Table 3.6.1 Remote Handset Menu List

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


4H
3H
POSITION
2H
OLDER
1H
0.5H
ALARM
DIST/URG ON Fixed on “ON”
ON
SAFETY
EXT ALARM OFF
ON
ROUTINE
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
STATUS UNABLE
NO REASON
BUSY
UNABLE Selectable when COMPLY STATUS
EQUIP DISBLD
REASON is UNABLE
AUTO ACK MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL
POSITION ON
CALL OFF
ON
POLLING CALL
OFF
RCVD
ORDINARY
ERASE xxxx
RCVD
ERASE LOG ARE YOU SURE?
DISTRESS
YES NO
TRANS-
MITTED
INTL
USA
MEMORY WX 50 entry
CHANNEL CANADA
INLND-WA Indicates when entering ATIS ID
ERASE
COAST CALL
MESSAGE SHIP CALL For editing message of each CALL
100 entry
FILE ENTRY GROUP CALL type (Refer to the DSC Call menu.)
PSTN CALL

Cont’d

3-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3.6 Remote Handset Menu(Russian Ver.)

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Menu-4 Note


AUTO
LAT
POSITION
MANUAL LON
TIME
DATE 2006-03-27
RTC
TIME 06:32:55
AUTO
XMTD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
PRINT OUT RCVD CALL
MANUAL
AUTO
DAILY TEST
MANUAL
KEY CLICK 8 (0 to 16)
EARPIECE 9 (8 to 16)
VOLUME INTERCOM 8 (1 to 16)
OFF HOOK ON
SPKR OFF
ENABLE
AUTO CH AUTO CH
DISABLE
PSTN CH PSTN CH 00
ABLE
NETRAL CALL
SPECIAL UNABLE
CALL ABLE
MEDICAL CALL
UNABLE
Checks only MMSI
SELF ID e.g. 432456789
Transceiver unit executes the setting.
GROUP ID for GROUP CALL
GROUP ID
message recorded in MESSAGE
LIST
FILE ENTRY menu is displayed.
RT: FM8800
By pressing [Shift] -> [4:IntCom],
1: Handset 1
SYSTEM INTERCOM the recorded name in the left box
2: Handset 2
NAMING are displayed to find the other side
3: Handset 3
easily.
4: Handset 4
- DUP Rx board (Yes): FM8800D
FM8800D/S
PROGRAM - DUP Rx board (No): FM8800S
0550220-01
VERSION FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the
EXT: ENT
same version.

Alternative Operations
- Turn on the power while pressing [MENU] key.
Set the ID number for Handset
(See Chapter 4 System Setting for details.)
- Turn on the power while pressing [TEST] key.
Test mode of Handset
(See Chapter 8 Maintenance for details.)
- Adjustment of Dimmer
[SHIFT] -> [2]
- Adjustment of Contrast
[SHIFT] -> [SHIFT], [LOG] or CHANNEL knob

3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 4. System Setting
4.1 Call up for Option Menu

Adjustment of LCD Dimmer: [SHIFT] -> [2]


Adjustment of LCD Contrast: [SHIFT] -> [SHIFT], [LOG] or CHANNEL knob

4.1 Call up for Option Menu


MMSI, Channel and Power settings can be set up by going to SYSTEM menu and then
to “option”. Following is the procedure.

Procedure
1. With the power off, make a jumper connection between 2 and 15 of
[PRINTER] port. Or, jumper connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810.
However, it is correspondence from production in December 2005.
Case-1)

Jumper between #2 and #15 PRINTER

- OR -
Case-2)

FM-8800S/D

CPU J1: [PRINTER]


(05P0773)
1
2
STROBE N
D0 IF-8810
3 D1
4 D2
Jumper
13 SELECT #2 - #15
IF-8810
14 ALF N
15 ERROR N
16 INIT N

TB1
jumper connection
J2: [IEC61162-1/REMOTE]
between 25 and 26
1 +15VDC
2 +15VDC Jumper
3 +15VDC #25 - #26
4 +15VDC 24
5 N.C 25 NOT USED-1
6 N.C 26 NOT USED-2
7 TXD(H)
27
8 RXD(C)

4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.1 Call up for Option Menu

2. Turn on the power and press [MENU] key. Then menu list comes on.
3. Select SYSTEM using the [▼] key from the menu list and press [ENT] key.

* SYSTEM SETUP MENU *


SELF ID -----------
GROUP ID LIST
INTERCOM NAMING
PROGRAM VERSION

4. Enter the password [x][x][x][x][x][x]. Then “▼” mark appears to the left of
PROGRAM VERSION and all of the system menus are called up.

* SYSTEM SETUP MENU *


SELF ID -----------
GROUP ID LIST
INTERCOM NAMING
Additional mark ▼PROGRAM VERSION

4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

4.2 ID Setting
4.2.1 SELF ID
When your own ID (MMSI) is not registered FM-8800S/D becomes the only operable
VHF function.
1. DSC communication is not available. Even if you press “CALL” key, “NO
MMSI” comes on, switch to DSC display can not be made, and editing DSC TX
message can not be done.
2. Even if you press [LOG] key, NO MMSI comes on, and DSC logs does not
open.
3. Distress Alert, All Ship Calls, Group Call and Area Call for the DSC cannot be
received.
4. Even if the position data are not inputted, alarm informing the input error of
position data does not go off.

INTL INTL

Hi
Rx
16
AUTO ACK WATCH CH 70
Hi
Rx

DSC NOT USABLE


16
LAT : 35 10’ N 10 : 10 UTC LAT : 35 10’ N 10 : 10 UTC
LON : 135 11’ E AUTO LON : 135 11’ E AUTO

INTL Ver. : Registered screen for MMSI INTL Ver. : Non-registered screen for MMSI

INTL INTL

Hi
Rx 16 Hi
Rx 16
AUTO ACK AUTO CH: ENA DSC NOT USABLE
LAT : 34 45.1111’ N 12:12 LAT : 34 45.1111’ N 12:12
LON : 135 45.1111’ E UTC LON : 135 45.1111’ E UTC
MMSI 432456789 AUTO MMSI --------------- AUTO

Russian Ver. : Registered screen for MMSI Russian Ver. : Non-registered screen for MMSI

NOTE)
In Russsian Ver., when turning on the power with the unregistered MMSI, “This unit CAN’T send
any DSC calls until ship’s MMSI is entered. Press any key!” pop-up menu is displayed.

4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

Procedure
1. Call up the option menu. See page.4-1 for details.
[MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> Input the password -> [ENT]
2. Select “SELF ID ______” and press [ENT] key.
3. ID ENTRY and ID CLEAR pop-up menus will appear.

ID ENTRY
ID CLEAR

4. Select ID ENTRY and press [ENT] key.


5. Enter your own ship’s MMSI and press [ENT] key.

How to clear /edit registered MMSI


To clear the registered MMSI:
By the second operation mentioned in above Procedure section, select ID CLEAR
and press [ENT] key.
To update the registered MMSI:
By the second operation in above Procedure section, select ID ENTRY, then ID
CLEAR to input new MMSI.

4.2.2 GROUP ID
GROUP ID can be registered by [MENU] -> MESSAGE FILE ENTRY. Up to the
maximum of 100 IDs can be registered.
Confirmation of registered ID can be done by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> GROUP ID
LIST.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> MESSAGE FILE ENTRY.

* MESSAGE FILE /13 *


1: SAKURA MARU
2: KOBE MARU
3:

8:

4-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

2. Bring a cursor onto the file number to register and press [ENT] key.

COAST CALL
COAST CALL
SHIP CALL
SHIP CALL
GROUP CALL
GROUP CALL
PSTN CALL
PSTN CALL
AREA CALL INTL Ver. Russian Ver.

3. Bring a cursor onto GROUP CALL and press [ENT] key.


GROUP ID consists of 9 digits that starts from “0”.

MESSAGE FILE x ENTRY MESSAGE FILE x ENTRY


CALL TYPE: GROUP CALL CALL TYPE: GROUP CALL
GROUP ID: 0 GROUP ID: 0
ROUTINE ROUTINE
TCmd1: SIMPLEX TP TCmd1: TELEPHONE
TCmd2: NO INFO TCmd2: NO INFO
CH: 16 CH: 16
NAME: NAME:
REGIST ERASE
REGIST ERASE

INTL Ver. Russian Ver.

4. Bring a cursor onto GROUP ID and press [ENT] key, then enter ID number.
5. Enter easily recognizable name. (NAME in Max. 16 characters)
6. Bring a cursor onto REGIST and press [ENT] key to enter ID number.

How to erase registered GROUP ID


Select the number to clear by [MENU] -> MESSAGE FILE ENTRY and press [ENT]
key which brings MESSAGE FILE x ENTRY display on and then, bring a cursor
onto ERASE and press [ENT] key.

How to confirm GROUP ID


Confirm by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> GROUP ID LIST. The registered file number
and ID will be displayed.

GROUP LIST 1/1


1: 012345678

2: 043256789

4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

4.2.3 Setting Remote Handset ID


Transceiver unit can be connected to a maximum 4 Handsets (RB-8800/HS-8800 and/or
RB-8810/HS-8800). A parallel connection is made with the data line between
Transceiver unit and Remote Handsets. Communication between each Remote Handset
and Transceiver unit is carried out on the basis of ID number set up for each Remote
Handset. When more than one handset is connected, set up each Remote Handset with
different ID. If the same ID number is in use with different Handset, the system does not
function properly.

Procedure
1. Turn on the power of Transceiver unit while pressing Remote Handset’s [Menu] key.
Other way,
Unplug Remote Handset from RB-8800/8810 and then plug it back in.
2. Indicated information in the box below will be displayed on the handset monitor,
which brings you to handset ID setup mode.

Version No.
0550216-01.0x
Now ID=1

Input
New ID (1–4) =

3. Enter numerical ID that you like to set up and press inputted ID numbers will go into
“Now ID” in the bottom of the handset monitor above
4. Turn off the power.
5. Take the same procedures from 1 through 4 to set up the ID numbers for other
Remote Handsets.

4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

Prioritizing of Remote Handset


The lower the ID number, the higher the priority level.
- Priority in this case means that indication/display of the Remote Handset’s detailed
program Ver. starts with the lowest ID number on top followed by the second lowest
ID number down to other program versions with higher ID numbers. Confirmation
can be made by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> TEST -> CPU -> PROG.VER.

PROGRAM VERSION

FM-8800 : 0550215-02
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Remote Handset version number is indicated
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 from a low ID number in order.
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Version number of the unconnected unit is
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 not indicated.
IF-8820 : 0550217-01

- Remote Handset program updating is carried out from a low ID number in order.
- Remote Handset priority is carried out from a low ID number in order.

Transceiver unit > Remote-1 > Remote-2 > Remote-3 > Remote-4

Wing MIC though, has no correlation with above-mentioned contents. For


example, when Wing MIC is in use, Transceiver unit’s MIC and Remote
Handset cannot be used. Also, when Transceiver unit’s MIC and Remote
Handset are in use, Wing MIC cannot be used.

4.2.4 INTERCOM NAMING


Assign a name to Transceiver unit and Remote Handset. (Ex. assigning a name to the
location of installed Remote Handset lets you know easily which where Remote
Handset that you called is when using INTERCOM.) When using INTERCOM, a
assigned name will be displayed on both Transceiver unit and Remote Handset side.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> INTERCOM NAMING and press [ENT] key. Then,
“Intercom Naming Menu” will appear.

* Intercom Naming Menu *


RT: FM-8800
The connected Remote Handset (the assigned
1: Handset 1 name) is displayed. Handset display number
2: Handset 2 is Remote Handset number which is set up by
3: Handset 3 the section 4.2.3.
4: Handset 4

2. Select item to be set up and press [ENT] key, which will open a pop-up window with
currently assigned name in it. Then, register a new name and press [ENT] key.
(Max. 12 characters)

4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

How to use INTERCOM


INTERCOM can be used between two Remote Handsets, and/or, between a Remote
Handset and Transceiver unit. While INTERCOM is being used caller’s Intercom
Naming: “OCCUPIED xxxxx” is displayed on other Handset, which is meant to
indicate that the intercom is in use.
To call up Remote Handset from Transceiver unit is as below. Same procedure is to be
taken when connecting between Remote Handsets, and/or, between a Remote Handset
and Transceiver unit. INTERCOM time out is 5 minutes. If the call is not picked up in 5
minutes (OFF HOOK), the call is automatically cancelled.

1. Press [SHIFT] -> [4:IntCom] key.

* Intercom Call Menu *


RT: FM-8800
1: Handset 1
“Intercom Naming” is displayed.
2: Handset 2
3: Handset 3
4: Handset 4

2. Select Remote Handset to call up and press [ENT] key.


3. When a Handset is called up the beep goes off and the caller’s assigned ID will be
shown on the display of the Handset called up at the same time.
To cancel your call, press [CANCEL] key. Both Transceiver unit and Remote
Handset return to their normal display.

INTERCOM

FM-8800

4. INTERCOM communication is started.

Note:
You can adjust the volume by [MENU] -> VOLUME -> INTERCOM VOLUME. This
adjustment can be made with either Transceiver unit side or each Remote Handset side.
However, this function is currently inoperative. (2005/5)

4-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

4.2.5 Setting of Transceiver unit function ID


This function is currently inoperative. (2005/5)
By setting up the Transceiver unit function ID in the put equipment side by side, the
next control can be carried out from one of FM-8800S/D.
For example:
- Prevention of incoming Tx noise.
VHF transmitting signals output MUTE signal and one of VHF detecting it goes
into a state of MUTE. To set this function available, you have to go to [MENU]
-> SYSTEM ->SP MUTE and then choose ON.

- Alarm Reset Function


When incoming DSC message, alarm goes off from VHFs. If you reset the
alarm on one of VHFs, alarm reset signal is outputted which resets the alarm
for the other VHF.

A connection to make function REMOTE ID effective

IF-8810

[IEC61162/Remote]

From/To
25: DATA A 30: DATA A Reomte Station
J3-3
FM-8800S/D 26: DATA B 31: DATA B
J3-4

[IEC61162/Remote]

40: DATA A 25
41: DATA B 26 FM-8800S/D

Fig. 4.2.1 Connection of VHFs

Procedure for setup


e.g.
1. Go to [MENU] -> REMOTE ID and press [ENT] key with No.1 VHF.

1: REMOTE ID= 1: Master (Polling station)


2: REMOTE ID=2: Slave

2. For example, select “1” and press [ENT] key.


3. Go to [MENU] -> REMOTE ID and press [ENT] key with No.2 VHF.
4. Select “2” and press [ENT] key.

4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

4.2.6 ATIS ID Setting


ATIS (Automatic Transmitter Identification System) automatically transmits at the end
of each transmission. This is monitored by authorities to keep surveillance over illegal
transmission.
When ATIS ID is set up, following menus can be set up as well.
1. INLND-WA set up by [MENU] -> MEMORY CHANNEL
2. ON/OFF set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH MODE -> INLND
3. RIVER/RIVER&SEA set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> ATIS ID -> AREA
- In case of REVER,
INLND-WA will be the only available when set up by [SYSTEM] ->
SYSTEM -> CH MODE. INTL, USA, CANADA and PRIV cannot be used.
- In case of REVER & SEA,
All set up by [SYSTEM] -> SYSTEM -> CH MODE can be set ON/OFF.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> ATIS ID and press [ENT] key.
2. Select ATIS ID and press [ENT] key. Below pop-up window will appear.

ID ENTRY
ID CLEAR
AREA

3. Select ID ENTRY and press [ENT] key.


4. Input ATIS ID of the own ship and press [ENT] key.
5. Bring a cursor onto ATIS ID again and press [ENT] key. A pop-up window of the step
2 will appear.
6. Select AREA first and then, select the operation area of the own ship, RIVER or
RIVER & SEA, then press [ENT] key.

How to clear/edit registered ATIS ID


To clear ATIS ID:
As just mentioned in the second procedure above, select ID CLEAR and press
[ENT] key.
To edit ATIS ID:
Take the same procedure and select “ID ENTRY” then edit or select “ID CLEAR”
to register new ATIS ID.

4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.2 ID Setting

Outline of ATIS
The operating INLAND channel transmits ATIS signals. When carrying this out is:
- When a continuous transmission takes place, at the end of each transmission.
- When transmitting continuously, ATIS signal is transmitted every 5 minutes.
TX output is normal and audio(voice) input is automatically set to OFF during a
ATIS signal transmission.
The system is a synchronous system using a ten-unit error-detecting code. The first
seven bits of the ten-unit code are information bits. Bits 8, 9 and 10 indicate, in the
form of a binary number, the number of B elements that occur in the seven
information bits, a Y element being a binary number 1 and a B element being a binary
number 0.
- Modulation frequency: 1300 Hz (Y=1) and 2100 Hz (B=0)
- Modulation rate: 1200 baud
- Modulation index: 1.0 + 10%
- Format
Dot pattern Phasing Format specifier Identification End of sequence Error check

20 bits 6 DX(125) 2 identical symbols 5 symbols 3 DX(127) 1 symbol


8 RX(111 to 104) (121: 2 times) (2 times) 1 RX(127) (2 times)

ATIS ID can be modulated by call sign. ID consists of :


Z MID X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
- Z: represents the figure 9
- MID: represents the MID (Maritime Identification Digits) for R/R (Radio
Regulations)
- X3 to X6: shall contain the number of the call sign
- X1 to X2: shall contain a figure representing the second letter of the call sign,
wherein 01 represents A, 02 represents B, -----.

For example, when the call sign is PC8075 and MID is Netherlands 244, ATIS ID is:

Call sign P C 80 75

ATIS ID 9 244 03 80 75 ATIS ID, which is set up


by 244038075

Signal Constitution 92 44 03 80 75

Note:
The first letter of the call sign (P): represents the country, so it is displaced to MID.

4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3 System Setting: User Menu


4.3.1 ALARM
1. POSITION OLDER
When manually setting up the positioning data by [MENU] -> POSITION, and update
is not set up within a designated time, alarm is outputted. Select the setup time from 0.5,
1, 2, 3 and 4 H. The factory setting value is 4 H. In the rule, when updating is not made
more than 4 hours, alarm output will be requested. When data is not updated within 23.5
hours, data will be erased and will not be used. It is not included in the Distress Alert
Message, Position Request etc.
A position data inputted by MANUAL can be erased with turning the power OFF.

[ENT]
* SETUP MENU *
[ENT]
ALARM * ALARM MENU *
4H
AUTO ACK POS. OLDER 3H
ERASE LOG 4H 2H
MEMORY CHANNEL EXT ALARM 1H
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY 0.5H

Note:
The sentence to be received is IEC61162-1.
- Position: GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
- Date: ZDA>RMC
- Time: ZDA>GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
As for the manual input, when the positioning data is inputted from GPS, switch to the
GPS data automatically.
As for alarm output
Alarm output when a position update can not be made manually
- Output interval: Every POSITION OLDER setup
- Alarm output: 2200 Hz (50 ms), 3 times every 2 seconds
- Pop-up message: Warning: Update Pos.
Alarm output when manual input of position is interrupted
- Output interval: Every minute
- Alarm output: 2200 Hz (50 ms), 3 times every 2 seconds
- Pop-up message: GPS ERROR
Measure to be taken when data are interrupted is the same one taken when
updating the position manually. Data is stored for 23.5 hours.

** Note that when using GPS data, manual input is not available.

4-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

2. EXT ALARM
This is to set up the external alarm, which is in relation with a category of received DSC
message. In Distress (DIS) or Urgency (URG) category, this is always set to ON. In
ROUTINE or SAFETY categories, ON/OFF set up can be made. All factory settings are
ON. To stop alarm output:
- DIS/URG: Until you press [CANCEL] key.
- SAFETY: Automatically stops 2 minutes after receiving, or until [CANCEL] key is
pressed.
- ROUTINE: Automatically stops 2 minutes after receiving, or until [CANCEL] key
is pressed.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> ALARM and press [ENT] key.
2. Select EXT ALARM. Set up the category to output EXT ALRM and press [ENT]
key.

* SETUP MENU * [ENT]


[ENT]
ALARM * ALARM MENU * [ENT]
AUTO ACK POS. OLDER DIS/URG:ON
ERASE LOG ON
4H SAFETY: OFF
MEMORY CHANNEL OFF
EXT ALARM ROUTINE: ON
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY
[IEC61162/REMOT]

Junction box
EXT ALM output; CPU
(05P0773) (IF-8810)

Normal Open Q2
2SK3022
CR2
DSM10C
EXT ALM_N J2-1 TB-6
11
EXT ALM Cont. 0V TB-7
EXT ALM
J2-2
12

C31 C29
0.01u 0.01u
Recommendation:
Less than 0.5 A for loading EXT ALM
Maximum rating of 2SK3022
Maximum rating of DSM 10 C - VDSS (Drain source voltage): 60 VDC
- IF (Forward current): 1 A - VGSS (Gate source voltage): +20 VDC
- VRM (Reverse tolerance pressure): 200 V - ID (Drain current): +5 A (DC), +10 A (Pulse)
- Pd (Maximum power loss): 10 W

EXT ALM output;


[IEC61162/REMOT]

Normal Close
(2006/6 and after) CPU
(05P0773)
Junction box
(IF-8810)
U44
PS7241 1B F3 CR2
DSM10C
3 EXT ALM_H J2-1 TB-6
11
1 EXT ALM_C TB-7
EXT ALM
J2-2
C29
12
EXT ALM Cont. 2 0.01u
4

C31
Maximum rating; 50V/80mA
0.01u

Fig. 4.3.1 EXT ALM System Diagram

4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3.2 AUTO ACK


Select AUTO or MANUAL by [SHIFT] -> [5:ACK] whether to respond (BQ: COMPLY
STATUS) to Ship call, Coast Call, Position Call and Polling Call can be set up. With
AUTO, BQ is transmitted automatically, and with MANUAL, BQ is transmitted
manually.

Note:
- Ship Call 1. ACK Request Normally, receives call-up for all
AUTO ACK setting
- Coast Call ships, a channel in use by
- Position Call 2. ACK BQ - ATUO or MANUAL
- COMPLY STATUS: [CANCEL] -> [ENT] is
- Polling Call
(COMPLY STATUS) ABLE/UNABLE automatically changed to CH16.
When you do not want to change
Note; Polling Call is deleted in Russian Ver. a channel in use, press
[CANCEL] key twice.

AUTO ACK non-operation conditions


1. When MANUAL ACK is in use.
2. When Handset of Transceiver unit is in a state of OFF HOOK.
3. When Remote Handset is in a state of OFF HOOK.
4. When detecting ECC ERROR to RX RQ message.
5. When a category of RX RQ message is Safety, Urgency, and Distress.
6. As for Position Call, a setup made by [MENU] -> AUTO ACK -> POSITION
CALL is set to OFF.
7. As for Polling Call, a setup made by [MENU] -> AUTO ACK -> POLLING CALL
is set to OFF.
8. The communication channel is not specified.
9. When TCmd1 assigns Data and FAX.
10. In Russian Ver., when [MENU] -> AUTO CH is set to DISABLE.

1. COMPLY STATUS, UNABLE REASON


You can respond to incoming RQ message with either ABLE or UNABLE message as
your BQ message. The factory setting value is ABLE. When selecting UNABLE,
UNABLE REASON has to be set up.

Table 4.3.1 Operation of AUTO/MANUAL ACK

COMPLY STATUS: ABLE COMPLY STATUS: UNABLE


AUTO ACK Transmits “Able” automatically Transmits “Unable” automatically
MANUAL ACK Transmits “Able” manually Transmits “Unable” manually

4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> AUTO ACK and press [ENT] key.
2. Select COMPLY STATUS and set up either ABLE or UNABL. And then, press
[ENT] key.
3. When setting UNABL setting, select UNABLE REASON.
[ENT]
* SETUP MENU * [ENT]
* AUTO ACK MENU *
ALARM ABLE
COMPLY STATUS ABLE UNABLE
AUTO ACK
UNABLE REASON
ERASE LOG
NO REASON
MEMORY CHANNEL
POSITION CALL ON
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY NO REASON
POLLING CALL ON
BUSY
EQUIP DISBLD
MODE UNAVAIL
CH UNAVAIL

2. POSITION CALL, POLLING CALL


Both factory settings are ON.
POSITION CALL
When POSITION CALL is ON, BQ message (includes the own ship’s position
data) is automatically transmitted in response to POSITION CALL from other
ships. Your own ship’s position is the one indicated on the display.
POLLING CALL (Cannot use in Russian Ver.)
POLLING is to see if you are in a communicable range with other ships. If
POLLING CALL is ON, your BQ message (not include the own ship’s position
data) is automatically transmitted in response to incoming Polling Calls from other
ships.

4.3.3 MEMORY CHANNEL


To call up a registered channel, switch the mode by [SHIFT] -> [7: INTL/USA].
“MEMO xx” will be indicated on the mode indication part.
How to operate MEMORY CHANNEL:
1. The maximum of 50 channels are available.
2. The only modes that can be registered is the ones chosen by [MENU] -> SYSTEM
-> CH MODE. After a registration, even if CH MODE is prohibited, you can call
up a registered channel mode.
3. Memory channel is reflected in the state of channels (TRX, DUP/SIMP and TX
POWER) set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH CONFIG.

4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> MEMORY CHANNEL and press [ENT] key.
2. Select a “Memory Channel” and press [ENT] key.
3. Select a mode and press [ENT] key.
4. Select a channel of the mode and press [ENT] key.

* SETUP MENU *
[ENT] [ENT]
ALARM * Memory channel 1/7 *
[ENT] 01: _ _ _ _______ INTL INTL
AUTO ACK
ERASE LOG 02: _ _ _ _______ 01
USA
MEMORY CHANNEL 03: _ _ _ _______ WX
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY 04: _ _ _ _______ CANADA
05: _ _ _ _______ INLND-WA
06: _ _ _ _______ ERASE
07: _ _ _ _______
08: _ _ _ _______

Only for the set CH MODE is shown.

How to erase MOMORY CHANNEL


Select a channel to be erase and select “ERASE” press [ENT] key.

4.3.4 MESSAGE FILE ENTRY


When transmitting registered message, press [FILE] -> Select from File List -> [CALL]
key. When transmitting an edited message, you have to press [ENT] key and edit the
content beforehand and press [CALL] key.
How to operate message:
1. The maximum of 100 messages.
2. The only category to register is “ROUTINE”.
3. The message “NAME” to register is a maximum of 16 characters.
4. The only mode channel to register is INTL.
5. Above stated channels are the reflection/display of the state of TRX, DUP/SIMP
and TX POWER of INTL set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH CONFIG.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> MESSAGE FILE ENTRY and press [ENT] key. Or, the same
display can be called up by pressing [FILE] key
2. Select a file number to memory and press [ENT] key.
3. Select CALL TYPE and press [ENT] key.
4. Create a message and bring a cursor onto REGIST and press [ENT] key.

4-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

* SETUP MENU * [ENT] [ENT]


* MESSAGE FILE 1/13 *
ALARM COAST CALL
01:
AUTO ACK 02: SHIP CALL
[ENT]
ERASE LOG 03: GROUP CALL
MEMORY CHANNEL 04: PSTN CALL
MESSAGE FILE ENTRY 05: AREA CALL
06:
07: Note; AREA CALL is deleted in
08:
or [FILE] Russian Ver.

MESSAGE FILE x ENTRY MESSAGE FILE x ENTRY


CALL TYPE : COAST CALL CALL TYPE : COAST CALL
COAST ID : 00 COAST ID : 00
ROUTINE ROUTINE - Category: Only ROUTINE
TCmd1 : SIMPLEX TP TCmd1 : TELEPHONE - CH: Displays CH list that can be used by
TCmd2 : NO INFO TCmd2 : NO INFO TCmd1 (DUP/SIMP) setup.
CH : 16 CH : NO INFO The channel should be INTL channel.
NAME : EOS: RQ - NAME: Max. 16 characters
NAME :
REGIST ERASE REGIST ERASE

INTL Ver. Russian Ver.

How to erase message file


Select a message to erase, “ERASE” and press [ENT] key.

How to operate Message File


When creating DSC TX message, press [FILE] key on item to input ID. A list
registered by MESSAGE FILE ENTRY will appear. This list is shown each call type.
Selecting a station to call up from this list will input its MMSI.

** Compose Message ** SELECT COAST 1/1 ** Compose Message **


CALL TYPE : COAST CALL 1: YOKOHAMA CALL TYPE : COAST CALL
TO : YOKOHAMA
COAST ID : 00 2: KOBE COAST ID : 0043100xx
ROUTINE ROUTINE
TCmd1 : SIMPLEX TP TCmd1 : SIMPLEX TP
TCmd2 : NO INF TCmd2 : NO INF
CH : NO INFO CH : NO INFO

Bring a cursor onto ID and press For example, select YOKOHAMA.


[FILE] key. COAST station list COAST ID is automatically retrieved
will appear. from a message file.

4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3.5 POSITION
This is to select a positioning data either by MANUAL or AUTO. Sentences to receive
are IEC61162-1 (equal to NMEA Ver.3): GGA > RMC > GNS > GLL and ZDA. When
manual input position, it changes to GPS data automatically when inputted the position
data from GPS and so on. Then, when using GPS data, manual input is not available.
The related setting is [MENU] -> POSITION OLDER.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> POSITION and press [ENT] key.
2. Select INPUT TYPE, either AUTO or MANUAL, and press [ENT] key.
If a positioning data is inputted, select AUTO. When MANUAL is set up, input your
own ship’s position and positioning time.
[ENT] [ENT]
* SETUP MENU *
POSITION INPUT TYPE: AUTO AUTO
PRINT OUT
LAT : 35°10’ 0
VOLUME MANUAL
LON : 135°10’ 0
SYSTEM
TIME : 11:10

How to operate IEC61162-1


1. UTC shown on VHF display is an indication of ZDA time. When there is no ZDA
available, time available in GGA > RMC > GNS > GLL will be used.
2. ZDA is used to indicate Date/Time on a printed-out self-test result. When ZDA is
not available, time available in a GGA > RMC > GNS > GLL, and date available
in a ZDA > RMC will be used.
3. Matching talker: GP > LC > DE > II > IN > EC > TR > LA > OM
4. Data can be received regardless of the availability of expansion field.

Table 4.3.2 Operation of the IEC61162-1

Check-Sum GPS Quality Indicator Status Mode Indicator


Sentence
Yes No 1, 2, 3 Valid (A) A, D, E, M
GGA Used Used Used
RMC Used Used Used Used
GNS Used Used Used
GLL Used Used Used Used
ZDA Used Used

GPS quality indicator Mode indicator:


0 = fix not available or invalid A = Autonomous mode
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid D = Differential mode
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid M = Manual input mode
4 = Real Time Kinetic. System used in RTK mode S = Simulator mode
with fixed integers N = Data not valid
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode
with floating fingers
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulator mode

4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3.6 RTC (Russian Ver.)


To activate this function, the RTC board is necessary. RTC of date/time is used for Time
stamp in the [LOG] menu. The input sentence to be used proofreads RTC for every
second by ZDA>RMC.
If the input data stops, RTC is counted from the time of breaking off. Furthermore,
when setting RTC by manual, set date and time in [MENU] -> RTC, and press the
[ENT] key. It is changed to the setting data and counted the time. The backup time of
RTC is held one week or more.

4.3.7 PRINT OUT


This is to set up whether you want to print XMTD CALL, RCVD CALL, and DAILY
TEST result manually or automatically. The factory setting is all MANUAL. Even when
XMTD CALL and RCVD CALL are setup on MANUAL, if you open a file to be
printed out from [LOG] and press [6: PRINT] key, you can still print them out. To carry
out DAILY TEST, you have to keep the result displayed and then press [6: PRINT] key.
When AUTO (e.g. RCVD CALL) is in use and a printer is not connected “Printer PE”
error will appear.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> PRINT OUT and press [ENT] key.
2. Select XMTD CALL, RCVD CALL, and DAILY TEST and choose either AUTO or
MANUAL and then press [ENT] key.

* SETUP MENU *
[ENT]
POSITION **** PRINT MENU **** [ENT]
PRINT OUT XMTD CALL MANUAL AUTO
VOLUME RCVD CALL MANUAL MANUAL
SYSTEM DAILY TEST MANUAL

Print samples
** Received Message ** ** Transmitted Message **
* Daily test result * MAY06/’05 18:34 ECC : OK MAY06/’05 18:34
MAY06/’05 18:34 SHIP CALL SHIP ACK
MMSI: 432456789 FROM : 123456789 TO : 123456789
TX POWER: OK ROUTINE ROUTINE
TX/RX PCB: OK TCmd1 : SIMPLEX TP TCmd1 : SIMPLEX TP
CPU PCB: OK TCmd2 : NO INFO TCmd2 : NO INFO
CH70RX PCB: OK CH : 12 CH : 12

Self-test RX Message TX Message


NOTE) EOS(RQ/BQ) is printed on NOTE) EOS(RQ/BQ) is printed on the
the last line in Russian Ver. last line in Russian Ver.

Note: Requirement for the printer connection


In a rule, if the storage capacity of RX message is 20 or more, it is not necessary to
connect a printer.
FM-8800S/D:
RCVD ORDINARY and RCVD DISTRESS log are a maximum of 50 respectively.
More than 50 logs are erased from old order.

4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3.8 VOLUME
This is to set up volume.
- KEY CLICK
- EARPIECE LEVEL : EARPIECE for Transceiver unit
- INTERCOM VOLUME : EARPIECE at the time of INTERCOM
- OFFHOOK SPKR : ON/OFF of SP at the time of OFF HOOK
These are set up respectively. Each Remote Handset and Transceiver unit side is
independent respectively.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> VOLUME and [ENT] key.
2. Select an item to set up and press [ENT] key.
3. Set an appropriate level.

[ENT] xxx LEVEL SETUP


* SETUP MENU * **** VOLUME MENU ****
[ENT] LEVEL (1 – 16)
POSITION KEY CLICK 8
EARPIECE LEVEL 9 <_____ > 8
PRINT OUT
VOLUME INTERCOM VOLUME 8 EXT: ENT
SYSTEM OFFHOOK SPKR OFF
ON
OFF

Note:
1. The minimum level of EARPIECE is “8”. It can output more than 1 mW. The
maximum volume is 2 mW approximately.
2. In case OFFHOOK SPKR is set up to ON, the receiving sounds from the speaker
are outputted even if Handset is OFF HOOK.

4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.3 System Setting: User Menu

4.3.9 AUTO CH (Russian Ver.)


The state of AUTO ACK is set to ON and ON-HOOK.
When received the INDVIDUAL/ROUTINE call, communication CH changes
automatically after returning AUTO ACK.
(ENABLE: Auto change, DISABLE: Manual change)
In case of OFF-HOOK, even if AUTO CH is set to ENABLE, it is not automatically
changed to the communication CH.

* SETUP MENU * **** AUTO CH MENU ****


[ENT]
[ENT] AUTO CH: ENABLE ENABLE
POSITION
RTC DISABLE
PRINT OUT
VOLUME
AUTO CH

4.3.10 PSTN CH (Russian Ver.)


When not specifying TLE CH from COAST with PSTN CALL of from COAST to SHIP,
assign the TEL CH, which is set in this time, to ACK BQ message.
Normally, specifying the TEL CH is assigned by COAST.
[ENT]
[ENT]
* SETUP MENU *
**** PSTN CH MENU **** xx
PSTN CH
PSTN CH: xx
SPECIAL CALL
SYSTEM

4.3.11 SPECIAL CALL (Russian Ver.)


When setting ABLE, NEUTRAL CALL and MEDICAL CALL are available in the
SPECIAL menu of CALL TYPE for DSC.

* SETUP MENU * **** SPECIAL MENU ****


[ENT] [ENT]
PSTN CH NEUTRAL CALL: ABLE ENABLE
SPECIAL CALL MEDICAL CALL: ABLE DISABLE
SYSTEM

4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4 System Setting: Option Menu


To call up the option menu, see page 4-1.

4.4.1 AUTO 1W
In case of ON setup, VHF channel output is automatically reduced to 1W.
VHF to control channel is as follow:
- “LOW POWER” channel which is described on VHF channel list.
- A channel which is set up to LOW POWER by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH
CONFIG.
All channels are Hi Power when setting OFF.
Then, the reduced channel by 1W cannot be set up to Hi power even if [0:HI/LO] key is
pressed.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> AUTO 1W and press [ENT] key.
2. “ON/OFF” pop-up window will appear. Then, select ON and press [ENT] key.

4.4.2 AUTO REVERD


In case of ON setup, it goes back to CH16 automatically when Transceiver unit Handset
or Remote Handset are back on Hanger. (ON HOOK)

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> AUTO REVERD and press [ENT] key.
2. “ON/OFF” pop-up window will appear. Then, select ON and press [ENT] key.

4.4.3 CH70 BOARD


This function is not available.

4-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4.4 CH CONFIG
This is to set up operating channels for INTL, USA, WX, CANADA, INLAND-WA and
PRIV mode. Setting items are as below.

Table 4.4.1 CH CONFIG. Setting

Setting The setting items Remarks


INTL
USA
When setting the specified mode to
WX
MODE operate, carry out ON/OFF setup of each
CANADA
mode by CH MODE.
INLND-WA
PRIV
CHANNEL XX Specified a channel according to MODE
TX ENABLE TX/RX Operation
TRX RX ENABLE Operation only for RX
UNABLE TX/RX Prohibition: CH is not selectable.
DUP DUP Operation
DUP/SIMP
SIMP SIMP Operation
HI 25 W Operation
TX POWER
LOW 1 W Operation

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH CONFIG and press [ENT] key.

** Channel config. **
MODE : INTL
CHANNEL :01
TRX :TX ENABLE
DUP/SIMP : SIMP
TX POWER : HI

1: Back 2: Next

2. Setting items can be switched with a Channel Knob and a set up value by [1] and [2]
key. Select MODE and CHANNEL. Then, set up TRX, DUP/SIMP and TX POWER
of the channel and press [ENT] key.
3. Press [CANCEL] key. Below pop-up window will appear. Start up power again.

TURN OFF/ON

4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4.5 CH MODE
This is to set up ON/OFF for INTL, USA/WX, CANADA, INLND and PRIV mode.
You can switch the mode by pressing [SHIFT] -> [7: INTL/USA]. The mode set up by
CH CONFIG. has to be set to ON in order for it to be available in this mode setting.
MODE
INTL : ON [ENT]
USA/WX : OFF
CANADA : OFF
ON/OFF
INLND : OFF INLND:
PRIV : OFF
When ATIS ID is registered, ON/OFF
is available.
Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> CH MODE.
2. Bring a cursor onto a mode to setup and press [ENT] key to set up “ON/OFF”.

4.4.6 SCAN/DW
This is ON/OFF setting for SCAN and Dual Watch.
Dual Watch

Additional Channel
CH16
ex: CH06
T=1000 ms T=150 ms

1. Receives CH16 and Additional Channel to watch alternately at the above timing.
2. LCD channel indication is changed at the same timing.
3. When receiving CH16 during Dual Watch, it is locked. Dual Watch function resumes
5 seconds after a signal is lost.
4. Even if receiving Additional Channel, it receives alternately at the above-mentioned
timing.
5. Set PTT switch of Handset to ON or press [SHIFT] -> [9: DW] key by turns. Dual
Watch function stops.

4-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

Scan Watch
! CH14 ! CH16 ! CH 15 ! CH 16 ! CH 17 ! CH 16 !
 CH 03  CH 16  CH 02  CH 16  CH 01  CH 16 

1. Receive all channels of the elected channel mode via CH16 sequentially as above
order.
2. Receives each channel every 150 ms.
3. LCD channel indication changes at the same timing.
4. When receiving CH16 during Scan, it is locked. (The signal is receiving.)
5. RX signals are received and locked. Scan resumes 5 seconds after a signal is lost.
6. Even if Additional Channel receive RX signal, it receives CH16 for 150 ms every
1000 ms.
7. When [LOG] key is pressed while Additional Channel receives RX signal, it can skip
to the next channel.
8. To stop Scan, turn PTT switch to ON, or press [SHIFT] -> [8: Scan] key orderly.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> SCAN/DW.
2. Bring a cursor onto a mode to set up and press [ENT] key to set up ON/OFF.

SCAN/DW [ENT]
SCAN : ON
DW : ON ON/OFF

4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4.7 SP MUTE
This setting is effective in FM-8800D. This sets up whether you want the Transceiver
unit’s audio output from speaker to go off or not during transmission through Duplex
channel. This function is in relation with the setup by [SYSTEM] -> VOLUME -> OFF
HOOK SPKR.

Table 4.4.2 FM-8800D SP MUTE function

Setting for SP MUTE


ON OFF
Transmission by OFF HOOK ON SP (No Output) SP (Output)
DUP CH SPKR OFF SP (No Output) SP (No Output)
Transmission by OFF HOOK ON SP (No Output) SP (No Output)
SIMP CH SPKR OFF SP (No Output) SP (No Output)

You have to set OFF HOOK SPKR to ON and SP MUTE to OFF if you want
Transceiver unit’s audio output from speaker to go off during a transmission through
Duplex channel.

Procedure
1. Set [MENU] -> VOLUME -> OFF HOOK SPKR to ON.
2. Set [MENU] -> SYSTEM ->SP MUTE to OFF.

4.4.8 TIMEOUT TIMER


This is a setup that automatically stops the transmission after it was continuously sent
out for longer than 5 minutes. This function is effective in USA channel.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> TIMEOUT TIMER.
2. Bring a cursor onto a mode to set up and press [ENT] key to set up ON/OFF.

4-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4.9 REGULATION
This function is currently inoperative. (2005/5)
This is a setup to reserve in Russian Type Approval.
- INTL Ver. : Set to INTL.
- Russian Ver. : Set to RUSSIAN.

4.4.10 VDR OUTPUT LEVEL


The VDR connection port is connected to #23 and #24 inside the Junction box
(IF-8810). Balance type output is 600 ohm/0 dBm and the adjustable range is –10 dBm
to +10 dBm.

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> VDR OUTPUT LEVEL and press [ENT] key.
VDR OUTPUT LEVEL
LEVEL (1 – 16)
<■■■■ > 8
EXT: ENT

2. Set up the output level using either Channel Knob or arrow key and press [ENT] key
to store data.

Output Level

Factory setting value: 8


(Approximately 0 dBm)

Output data

Fig. 4.4.1 VDR Output

4-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.4 System Setting: Option Menu

4.4.11 STATION TYPE


COAST setting is prohibited. This function is not supported.
When setting to COAST, TX and RX frequency will be interchanged. Since FM-8800D
has Duplex Filter built in, COAST setup is prohibited.

4-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.5 Jumper Setting

4.5 Jumper Setting


4.5.1 Remote station
As for DATA and LINE of Remote station that is in far from Transceiver unit
electrically, set JP2 and 3 to ON for terminate.
- When connecting Remote station(RB-8800, 8810) via DMC I/F is the same.
- When DMC IF is connected only to DMC-5 and DMC I/F is installed electrically
far from Remote station, terminate DATA line on DMC I/F side.

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810
Junction box Terminater

Remote station

Remote station

Remote station

Remote station
IF-8810 RS-485 and LINE

HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &
DATA A/B

FM-8800D/S LINE IN/OUT

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810

RB-8800/RB-8810
DMC I/F
IF-8820
Remote station

Remote station

Remote station

Remote station
Terminater
HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &

HS-8800 &
DATA A/B RS-485 and LINE

LINE IN/OUT

Terminater
RS-485

TXD
DMC-5

U1
(CPU) RXD

Fig. 4.5.1 Connection of DATA A/B Lines

LINE RS-485
TERMINATION TERMINATION

JP3 JP2
1 3 1 3
ON ON

05P0782

Fig. 4.5.2 RB-8800, Jumper Setting

4-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.5 Jumper Setting

RS-485
TERMINATION

JP3
1 3
ON

LINE
TERMINATION

JP2
1 3
ON

05P0798

Fig. 4.5.3 RB-8810, Jumper Setting

RS-485
TERMINATION

JP4
1 3
ON

Note:
JP3:P.LOAD AD0 and AD1 are erased.
JP3 is to load a program of DMC I/F
CPU, and is also used in the factory.

AD0, AD1: Not used

05P0779

Fig. 4.5.4 DMC I/F, Jumper Setting

4-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.5 Jumper Setting

4.5.2 Select Wing MIC


You can select Carbon MIC or Dynamic MIC depending on Wing MIC type.
The factory setting is Dynamic MIC.

Table 4.5.1 W. MIC setting

J5 Setting MIC Input Level Remarks


Dynamic MIC: HS-6000FZ5 1 to 2 -48 dBm/600 ohm Factory default
Carbon MIC: HS-6000FZ6 2 to 3 0 dBm/40 ohm

W. HANDSET
C89 1u R106 J5
U42 1 Dynamic MIC
1k R111 2
R113 680
1000p

Carbon MIC
1000p

10k C91 3
C111
C110

CR17 1u
W. MIC(H)
R110
10k W. MIC(C) Wing MIC-1
R84
R108 47
820
C90 R83
10u 47
5V Wing MIC-2
CPU: 05P0773

Fig. 4.5.5 CPU Board, W. MIC Circuit

JP5
1 3

Fig. 4.5.6 CPU Board, Location of J5

4-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.5 Jumper Setting

4.5.3 When using Handset with removed (HS-2003)


When removing Handset (HS-2003) of Transceiver unit and operating only from the
Remote Handset, make a jumper connection between #1 and #2 of J15 on the CPU
board. This setup is made by compellingly wetting HOOK SW to ON HOOK on CPU
board.
Note: When disconnecting Handset (HS-2003) without this setting, it goes into a state
of OFF HOOK detected on CPU. That is, the operation and the transmission
from Remote Handset are not available because Transceiver unit Handset will
be in use. “OCCUPIED xxxx” will be indicated on Remote handset side, the
meaning is Transceiver unit is in use.

3.3V
HANDSET
(HS-2003) R190 U30:CPU
10k HD64F2377
U1 OUT Hook SW 3
P80 IRQ0
DN68485
J15

Apply board;
123 CPU 05P0773-33 and after
05P0773

Fig. 4.5.7 CPU Board, Circuit of J15

J15
- Not used Handset: Jumper #1 to #2
- Use Handset: Jumper #2 to #3

CPU (05P0773)

Fig. 4.5.8 CPU Board, Location of J15

4-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.6 When TR Antenna is used for CH70 WR

4.6 When TR Antenna is used for CH70 WR


When watching CH70 through TR antenna, a modification of internal wiring will be
necessary. In this case, CH70 cannot receive during VHF transmission.

J5 ANT
CH70 RX OUT CH70 RX
(05P0775)
J2
Rx AMP
Q7

CH70 RX ANT
HPA
U1 T/R
SW
DUPLEXER
Jumper
Simplex only DUP OUT
TX FIL
J1
DUP IN1 DUP RX
RX FIL
J2 DUP IN2
(05P0777)
J4
TX/RX ANT
(05P0774A/B) ANT
J3

Fig. 4.6.1 Antenna Connection

Connect the Mini-pin assembly (1) L-420 (Supplied material: Code 000-151-748)
between J5 on TX/RX board and J2 on CH70 RX board.

Pass the Mini-pin assembly


(1) through a hole. TX/RX: J5 CH70 WR: J2

Fig. 4.6.2 Location of the connector

4-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.7 μTP-80F Setup

4.7 μTP-80F Setup


This describes how to set up the printer:μTP-80F which is built in the RC-8800 wall
rack console. The factory setting of μTP-80F is a normal character.
When switching between normal and reversed characters, carry out the DIP switch
setup.

Normal character Reversed character Reversed character


(20 lines) (22 lines)

Print density knob DIP Switch


Dip SW-#2-ON
Reversed character

Fig. 4.7.1 μTP-80F

Print Density Adjustment


Print density is adjusted with the print density knob. To increase the density, turn the
knob counter clockwise. The higher the density, the shorten the life of the printer head
and the slower the printing speed.

4-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.7 μTP-80F Setup

1. DIP Switch Setting


The factory setting is the meshed state of Table 1 and 2.
Switch #2 switches between normal and reversed characters. When you switched the
DIP switch, turn on the power again.

Table 4.7.1 Function of DIP Switch

Function/Switch No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Small character size ON
Normal character size OFF
Reversed character ON
Normal character OFF
Pitch (22 lines) ON Not
Pitch (20 lines) OFF used
International character See Table 2.
See
Alpha Calibration
Table 3.
Automatic line feed ON

Table 4.7.2 International character setting Table 4.7.3 Alpha Calibration

Character 4 5 6 Value 7 8
0 OFF OFF
Japan OFF OFF OFF -1 OFF ON
US OFF OFF ON +1 ON OFF
German OFF ON OFF +2 ON ON
English OFF ON ON
French ON OFF OFF * These switches are used for
Spanish ON OFF ON mechanical calibration.
Italian ON ON OFF The value differs from set to set.
Swedish ON ON ON

NOTE;
For test printing:
1. Turn on the printer while pressing and holding down FEED switch.
2. All characters are printed out and then five line pattern is printed.
The printer is on-line after test printing.

- In case of PE during the test printing, returns to the state of PE after printing a line.
- To cancel the test printing, press SEL switch. It stops printing and changes to ON
LINE in a few moments.

4-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4.8 Change the Specification Power for PR-240-CE

4.8 Change the Specification Power for PR-240-CE


When switching the power supply, switch is made below two spots. Factory shipment is
220 VAC specification.

Change wiring
Change the jumper

1. Change of wiring

White
Black

1
2
3
4
White Black

1
100VAC spec.

2
3
220VAC spec.

4
(default)

When changing the specification (Factory setting)


from 220 VAC to 100 VAC, move the second
wiring to the first on the terminal board.

2. Change of jumper

Red

SEL
115V

SEL
230V

Change the red cable with plug to the


specification power.

4-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 5. Block Description
5.2 Outline of Connection

5.1 Outline of Connection


Basically, equipments are connected via connection box/IF-8810. DMC-5, for example,
is connected via DMC IF(IF-8820). A total of 4 Remote Handsets can be connected via
IF-8810 and/or IF-8820. Communication between the Transceiver unit, Remote
Handsets, and DMC IF are carried out using RS-485.
CH70 ANT

TR ANT

15VDC
TXD TXD Ex:
RXD Plotter
EXT ALM
W-MIC1
W-SP1 RXD NAV
ANT W-PTT1 (GPS)
VDR AF
CH70 RX ANT DATA A/B EXT ALM
LINE IN EXT ALM Carbon MIC:
LINE OUT
W-MIC2 R80-VHF-B, HS-600FZ6
*Carbon MIC
IEC61162-1(NMEA/REMOTE)

W-SP 2 VDR AF R80-VHF-A, HS-6000FZ-5


W-PTT2 VDR
Handset Handset
(HS-2003) W-MIC *Dynamic MIC
W-SP
W-PTT MIC Receptacle Handset
(R80-VHF-B) (HS-6000FZ-5)
W-MIC *Dynamic MIC
W-SP
D-Sub 37P W-PTT MIC Receptacle Handset
(R80-VHF-B) (HS-6000FZ-5)
Junction Box

Handset Handset Handset Handset


IF-8810

15VDC (HS-8800) (HS-8800) (HS-8800) 15VDC (HS-8800)


EXT. SP DATA A/B DATA A/B
SPKR CONT CONT
(SEM-210)
DIST SW DIST SW
LINE IN/OUT LINE IN/OUT
Remote Station

Remote Station

Remote Station

Remote Station
15VDC Carbiom15VDC
DATA A/B DATA A/B
FM-8800D/S

LINE IN/OUT LINE IN/OUT


(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)

(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)

(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)

(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)
TR Unit

Handset Handset
15VDC (HS-8800) (HS-8800)
DATA A/B
CONT
DIST SW
LINE IN/OUT
Remote Station
Remote Station

15VDC 15VDC Same as


DATA A/B
LINE IN/OUT
DATA A/B above
LINE IN/OUT
(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)
(RB-8800)
(RB-8810)
DMC I/F
IF-8820

x4

TXD
RXD
Printer DMC-5
Printer (PP-510)
(PP-8800)
D-Sub 25P
24VDC

AC/DC Power 15A Connection of the unit surrounded by the dotted line cannot be
(PR-240-CE) performed in the Russian Ver.

Fig. 5.1.1 Outline of Connection

5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.2 I/O Port Specification

5.2 I/O Port Specification


5.2.1 IEC61162/REMOTE Port (D-Sub 37P)
Table 5.2.1 IEC61162/REMOTE Port

IN/OUT Pin No. Signal Specification Remarks


OUT 1–4 +15 VDC
Use jumper connection of
5–6 N.C
System Protection unlock
7 TXD (H) Outputs a position of other
OUT IEC61162-1 ships from DSC RX
8 TXD (C)
information with TLL
9 RXD (H)
IN IEC61162-1 GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL, ZDA
10 RXD (C)
Outputs ''L'' level when DSC
OUT 11 EXT ALM N Open Collector output message is DISTRESS or
Urgency category.
12 0V
WING MIC-1
13
(H) -46 dBm/600 ohm Selects Dynamic MIC and
IN
WING MIC-1 or 0 dBm/40 ohm Carbon MIC
14
(C)
WING SP-1
15
(H)
OUT
WING SP-1
(C)
IN 17 WING PTT-1 N
18 – 22 0V
23 VDR AF (H) 600 ohm/0 dBm
OUT
24 VDR AF (C) (Balanced)
OUT 25 DATA-A
RS-485/38.4 kbps
IN 26 DATA-B
27 LINE OUT (H) -10 dBm/600 ohm
OUT
28 LINE OUT (C) (Balanced)
29 LINE IN (H) -10 dBm/600 ohm
IN
30 LINE IN (C) (Balanced)
WING MIC-2 Dynamic MIC
31
(H) -46 dBm/600 ohm Selects Dynamic MIC or
IN
WING MIC-2 Carbon MIC Carbon MIC
32
(C) 0 dBm/40 ohm
WING SP-2
33
(H)
OUT
WING SP-2
34
(C)
IN 35 WING PTT-2 N
36 0V
37 F. GND

5-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.2 I/O Port Specification

5.2.2 PRINTER Port(D-Sub 25P)


Table 5.2.2 PRINTER Port

IN/OUT Pin No. Signal Specification Remarks


1 STROBE N
2 D0
3 D1
4 D2
OUT 5 D3
6 D4
7 D5
8 D6
9 D7
10 ACK N
11 BUSY
IN
12 PE
13 SELECT
OUT 14 ALF N
IN 15 ERROR N
16 INT. N
OUT
17 SLCT IN N
18 F.GND
19 0V
20 – 25 F. GND

Note;
In addition, use jumper connection of System protection unlock between #2 and #15
of [Printer] port

5.2.3 Handset MIC Connector


Table 5.2.3 MIC Connector

IN/OUT Pin No. Signal Specification Remarks


1 0V
2 PTT SW N
IN
3 MIC (H)
-46 dBm/600 ohm
4 MIC (C)
OUT 5 HS SP (H) 2 mW/150 ohm
IN 6 HOOK SW N
OUT 7 +5 VDC
8 F. GND

5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.3 Outline of Boards

5.3 Outline of Boards


The difference between FM-8800D and FM-8800S is whether there are DUPLEXER
and DUP RX board or not and TX/RX board.

- FM-8800S
DUPLEXER and DUP RX board: No TX/RX board: 05P0774A
- FM-8800D
DUPLEXER and DUP RX board: Yes TX/RX board: 05P0774B

+15VDC
IEC61162/
REMOTE/
EXT ALM/
VDR/
W-HANDSET-1
W-HANDSET-2

+5V J2 IEC61162/REMOTE
KX0-4
DIS LED
AL-S LED
AL-D LED
KEY LED J1 PRINTER
LED BRGI ADJ
LED EN
D0-3
POWER CL1-2 J12 EXT SP
VOL K/FLM
AUTO/SQ DISPOFF
SQ/VR VADJ CH70 IF OUT J3
CH70 RX ANT
(05P0787) J5 HS SP
CH70 J2
J4 (05P0775)
J1 J3 +15V/+5V J1
CH70 TEST
PANEL J5
ENT-1, 2 (05P0772) CH1,2 CH70 OSC DUP UNLOCK
CH CH-1, 2 PTT SW (38.4MHz) DUP INST
J3
(05P0788) J3 MIC DUP IF OUT
HOOK SW DUP RX
PWR SW J8 (05P0777)
VOL
AUTO/SQ
J2 J1
LCD +15V/+5V
MODULE DUP REF CLK/DATA/STB2
(25.6MHz) RX ON
HANDSET J3
PTT SW
MIC
J2 DUPLEXER
HS SP
HOOK SW CPU
RX FIL
TX FIL

+5V
(05P0773)

* FM-8800D only

REF OSC
INT SP (25.6MHz) J1 J4 J2
J13 J8
J6 TX MIX J5
(45MHz)
J9 J7

F VSWR/R VSWR TX/RX


SCLK PA TEMP (05P0774A/B)
SIO TRX UNLOCK
RTC CE ANT
J14
(05P0804) J10 J9
J3
+15V
PWR CONT
CLK/DATA/STB1 A: FM-8800S
TX ON/RX ON B: FM-8800D
TEST ON/TRX AGC
TRX IF OUT
PWR SW
POWER
24VDC (05P0776) 15VDC
TB1, 2 J1 J6
PWR SW

Fig. 5.3.1 Connection of each board

5-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.3 Outline of Boards

Table 5.3.1 Outline of each board

Unit Board Main function


Consists of CPU, DSP, CODEC, and DDS. 2nd IF: 37.5 kHz
from CH70 RX, TX/RX, DUP RX board is demodulated by
CPU
digitization. Audio signals are digitized just the same, is
(05P0773)
modulated on this board, and is outputted to TX/RX board
with 45 MHz.
Consists of TX/RX circuit. 05P0774A, SIMP-equipped
FM-8800S, and 05P0774B are installed in DUP-equipped
FM-8800D. The difference is whether there is a connector for
TX/RX DUPLEXER.
(05P0774A/B) - RX circuit: receives RX signal of 150 MHz, converts it into
2nd IF: 37.5 kHz and outputs it into CPU board.
- TX circuit: converts modulated signal of 45 MHz from CPU
board to TX frequency and outputs 25 W.
Has the same function as CH70 WR. This converts DSC RX
CH70 RX
signal of 156.525 MHz into 2nd IF:37.5 kHz and outputs it
FM-8800S (05P0775)
into CPU board.
FM-8800D
Is installed in FM-8800D. This board receives the signal when
DUP RX
DUP CH is selected, converts RX signal of 160 MHz into 2nd
(05P0777)
IF: 37.5 kHz, and outputs it into CPU board.
Is installed in FM-8800D. DUPLEXER prevents TX signal to
entering RX circuit and makes DUPLEX communication
DUPLEXER
possible by carrying out TX with LPF of 157.5 MHz and RX
with HPF of 160.6 MHz.
Outputs +15 VDC from input power of +24 VDC and is
POWER
equipped with over voltage protection, low voltage protection,
(05P0776)
and over-current protection.
PANEL Consists of LCD, KEY SW, and their lighting. LCD dot
(05P0772) numbers are 160 x 160. ** 26 characters x 20 lines.
Added to the Russian Ver.
RTC
On the RTC board, use for Time stamp (Date and Time) in the
(05P0804)
[LOG] menu.
JUNCTION BOX: JUNCTION Functions as a junction between the Transceiver unit and
IF-8810 (05P0790) Remote station, GPS, VDR and Wing-MIC.
Non-use for the Russian Ver.
DMC INTERFACE: DMC IF
Makes a communication with the Transceiver unit CPU and
IF-8820 (05P0778)
interfaces DMC-5 and a Remote stations.
HANDSET: HANDSET Is to be connected to the Transceiver unit and uses Condenser
HS-2003 (05P0780) MIC.
HS CONT Sends a result of key operation to the Transceiver unit CPU
(05P0781) and the Transceiver unit responds to its result.
HANDSET: KEY
Consists of lighting circuit of key and LED.
HS-8800 (05P0715)
LCD Module A total dot numbers are 91x72. Indication will be within 13
(MFM-073Q10) digits x 7 lines.
REMOTE
REMOTE Consists of DISTRESS ALERT BUTTON and AF AMP.
(05P0779)
STATION: RB-8800
TB (05P0782) Functions as a junction between a Remote stations
REMOTE
TB (05P0798) Functions as a junction between a Remote stations
STATION: RB-8810

5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4 Block Description


5.4.1 CH70 RX (05P0775)
This board is a CH70 WR. This board converts frequency from CH70 (156.525 MHz) to
2nd 1F and outputs it into CPU board. A self- test of this board does not check RX circuit
but inputs CH70 test signal from CH70 IF OUT line to see if that can be detected or not.
As for antenna, CH70 WR exclusive antenna is used and other way, when watching
CH70 through TR antenna a modification of internal wiring will be necessary. In this
case, CH70 receiving signal cannot receive during any transmissions. CH70 receiving
signal is received from J5 port on TX/RX board.

The main specifications are below.

Table 5.4.1 Specification of CH70 RX PCB

Item Specification
RX frequency CH70 (156.525 MHz)
Antenna input (J2) Impedance 150 MHz/50 ohm
1st IF frequency 38.3625 MHz
2nd IF frequency (CH70 IF OUT) 37.5 kHz/5 k ohm, -60 to +10 dBm output
1st Local frequency 23.6325 MHz x 5 =118.1625 MHz TP1 level: +4 to 7 dBm
2nd Local frequency 38.4 MHz (0 dBm, 50 ohm) TP4 level: 0 to 3 dBm
DSC sensitivity (CH70 board) Input level of SINAD is below 3 dBuV
Antenna input level below 0 dBuV ! BER (Bit Error Rate):
DSC sensitivity (total)
lower than 10-2 (Acceptable level: 6 dBuV.)

CPU
FL2: SAW FIL CR4, 5
05P0773
FL1
BPF(L/C) (156.525MHz) (38.3625MHz) MA728 R36 CH70 IF OUT
100
J3-#5 37.5kHz
Q3 Q2 Q4 Q7
U17
J2 CR6, 7 J3-#3 CH70 TEST CODEC
2SC3356 PMBFJ310 2SK882 2SC3324
ISS271 R37
CH70 ANT TP4
TP1 100k
(118.1625MHz) X5 38.4MHz
BPF(L/C) (118.1625MHz)
J1 U20
DSP
TP2, 3 Q1 Q8 J3-#1 +15V
2SC3356 2SK882 Y1:TCXO +3.3V +5V
J3-#2
CH70 RX (23.6325MHz) REG. U30
05P0775 U2 CPU
(TA48L033F)

Fig. 5.4.1 CH70 RX (05P0775) Block Diagram

5-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

CH70 receiving signal(156.525 MHz) inputted from the antenna reduce out-of-band
signals/noise with BPF (L/C) of 20 MHz and uses Q3 (RF AMP) to amplify it by
approximately 10 dB. Then, FL2 (SAW FIL, BW: ± 10 kHz) is installed in order to
improve “Blocking” efficiency. CR6 and 7 are 1st MIXER circuit that converts 156.525
MHz into 1st local of 118.1625 MHz and 1st IF signal of 38.3625 MHz.
156.525 MHz - 118.1625 MHz = 38.3625 MHz
118.1625 MHz is created by multiplying TCXO output of 23.6325 MHz ( ± 2.5 ppm)
with Q8. 1st IF signal, after being amplified by Q2 and Q4, and then is converted into
2nd IF signal of 37.5 kHz by 2nd MIXER circuit of CR4/5 and 2nd local signal of 38.4
MHz received from CPU board.
38.3625 MHz - 38.4 MHz = 37.5 kHz
This 37.5kHz signal is inputted into CPU board as CH70 IF OUT signal and is
demodulated with CODEC and DSP.

CH70 IF out:
-measures no modulation signal input with J3 - #5 on CH70 RX board.
CH70 SP SINAD:
-measures SP output (1W) of 1 kHz/70 % MOD.

20dB

10 2.15Vrms
SINAD(dB) Level(dBm)

0 0.77Vrms

CH70 IF out
-10

-20

-30

7.7mVrms
-40
CH70 SP SINAD
1mVrms
-50

-60

--10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110dBuV


SSG Level

Fig. 5.4.2 Input/Output characteristic on CH70 RX board

5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.2 DUP RX (05P0777)


This board is to be installed in FM-8800D and converts 160 MHz band RX signal of
DUPLEX RX frequency to 2nd IF and outputs it into CPU board. The self-test of this
board detects Un-Lock/Lock signal upon assessing the function of PLL circuit of 1st
local on this board. When installing this board and if J3 - #11 (DUP INST) is “L” level
then, CPU recognizes FM-8800D is in use and switches its program to one compatible
with DUPLEX. The main specifications are below.

Table 5.4.2 Main Specification of DUP RX PCB

Item Specification
RX frequency 160.625 MHz to 162.025 MHz
Antenna input (J1) Impedance 160 MHz/50 ohm
1st IF frequency 51.2375 MHz
2nd IF frequency (DUP IF OUT) 37.5 kHz/5 kohm, - 60 to +10 dBm output
Fo + 51.2375 MHz TP1 level: +3 to 5 dBm
1st Local frequency
TP4: VCO cont ! 4 to 5VDC at CH18(161.5MHz)
2nd Local frequency 51.2 MHz (0 dBm, 50 ohm) TP3 level: -2 to -1 dBm
SINAD 20 dB: below 2 dBuV.
Sensitivity NOTE: Loss of DUPLEXER somewhat lowers RX sensitivity
on TX/RX board compared to (SIMPLEX).

CPU
05P0773
R15V R15V R15V CR8/9
FL1
DUP RX BPF(L/C) BPF(L/C) (51.2375MHz) MA2J728 DUP IF OUT
J3-#14 37.5kHz U17
Q1 Q13 Q14 Q15 CODEC

J1 2SC3356 CR10/11
PMBFJ310
2SK882 2SC3324
TP1 ISS271 Rx 2nd Lo
TP3 (51.2MHz) U3
TC75HU04F
Rx 1st Lo 25.6MHz Ref. U20
(Fo+51.2375MHz) Q4
OSC DSP
+15V X2 J2
U5 VCO
R15V +15V Q5 Q6, CR3/4
BPF(L/C) uPC2745TB J3-#11 DUP INST
Q8 2SC3356 2SC3356
1SV229
TP4
RX ON J3-#10 RX ON
uPC2745TB

U4

Q7 LPF J3-#1 +15V U30


TP5 CPU
Q11
+3.3V J3-#3 +5V
+5V PMBFJ310
REG. TP2
U7 BPF(L/C) 51.2MHz PLL2 DATA
(TA48L033F) (CLK/DATA/STB)
PLL J3-#6, 7, 8
U8
(LMX2353TMX) J3-#9 PLL2 UN-LOCK
Q10
DUP RX
05P0777
TP6 +12V +15V
REG.
U10
(TA78L12F)

Fig. 5.4.3 DUP RX (05P0777) Block Diagram

5-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

160 MHz band RX signal of from DUPLEXER will be amplified by approximately 7


dB. BPF (L/C) of 156 to 163 MHz range is installed on Q1 input/output circuit. CR10
and 11 are 1st MIXER circuit that converts 160 MHz band RX signal into 1st IF signal of
51.2375 MHz by Fo+51.2375 MHz.
Fo - (Fo + 51.2375 MHz) = 51.2375 MHz
1 IF signal amplified by Q13 and 14 is converted into 2nd IF signal of 37.5 kHz by 2nd
st

local of 51.2 MHz on 2nd MIXER circuit of CR8/9. 51.2 MHz is created by multiplying
reference frequency of 25.6 MHz received from CPU board by 2 on U3.
51.2375 MHz - 51.2 MHz = 37.5 kHz
This 37.5kHz signal is inputted into CPU board as DUP IF OUT and is demodulated
with CODEC and DSP.

DUP RX IF out:
-measures no modulation signal input with J3 - #14 on DUP RX board.
SP SINAD:
-measures SP output (1W) of 1 kHz/70 % MOD. .

20dB

10 2.4Vrms
Level(dBm)

0 0.77Vrms

DUP RX IF out
-10

-20
SINAD(dB)

-30

7.7mVrms
-40

1mVrms
-50
SP SINAD
-60

--10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110dBuV


SSG Level

Fig. 5.4.4 Input/Output characteristic on DUP RX Board

5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.3 TX/RX (05P0774)

CH70 RX out

J5 AGC CONT Q112, 113


(Not used) J9-#25 AGC CONT
ANT
CR9 CR13
U17
RF AMP MIX FL2 MIX CODEC
J3 BPF(L/C) (2SC3356) BPF(L/C) ATT CR104 (51.2375MHz) CR106
J9-#27 RX IF OUT(37.5kHz)
Q7 Q6 Q111 Q114
DUP IN2
TP4
TP1
Rx Local R+15V
2nd Lo U20
J4 (F0+51.2375MHz) (51.2MHz)
Q20
DSP
FL1: 45MHz
DUP IN1 J7
45 MHz 45 MHz 45 MHz U25
U5 U10
(Modulated) DDS
X2 J8
J2 25.6MHz
Ref. OSC
PA MIX
DUP OUT CM Coupler (RA35H1516M) DRIVE BPF(L/C) CR101 U11
+8V REG TC75HU04F
U2 T/R F0 VCO
(DCS3D2D) U1 Q1 Q5 Q101 SW U8
SW Q13
Q14, Q116
J1 Jumper: CR11,12
PWR BIAS
Tx Local BPF(L/C) uPC2745TB CPU
SIMP only CONT (F0+45MHz) 2SC3356
2SC3356
1SV229 05P0773
UN LOCK T+15V TP2
uPC2745TB

T+15V Q2,10,102 TEST ON


U7

T15V
Q3,4,9,8,11 T15V, +15V
R15V
LPF
Q15
U4
U4 TP3
F-VSWR DET (2/2)
(1/2)
CR8 R52 51.2MHz PLL1 DATA
U3(1/2)
PLL J9-#17-19 (STB/DATA/CLK)
U12
R-VSWR DET (LMX2353TMX)
Q21
J9-#21 PLL1 UN-LOCK
CR103
CR6
U3(2/2)
TEST ON J9-#24 TEST ON

PWR CONT J9-#10 PWR CONT


U30
F VSWR J9-#12 F VSWR CPU
R VSWR J9-#13 R VSWR

J9-#23 RX ON
T+15V Q12, 17
J9-#22 TX ON
R+15V Q16, 18

TX/RX J9-#1-4 +15V


+15V
05P0774A (For FM-8800S) +5V
J9-#9 +5V

05P0774B (For FM-8800D)


TEMP. Sensor J9-#15 PA TEMP
U13
(LM60CIM3)

Fig. 5.4.5 TX/RX (05P0774) Block Diagram


5-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

The 05P0774A is installed in FM-8800S and the 05P0774B is installed in FM-8800D.


Both of them have almost the same circuit and their difference is recognized by the
availability of DUPLEX input/output connector.
RX circuit converts a signal to 2nd IF and outputs it into CPU board.. TX circuit consists
of MIXER, PA, and APC circuit. PLL circuit is used for both TX and RX. However,
FM-8800D carries out DUPLEX RX on DUP RX board. The self-test of TX/RX PCB
detects Un-Lock/Lock signal by assessing the efficiency of PLL circuit of 1st Local on
this board. The specifications are below.

Table 5.4.3 Main Specification of TX/RX PCB

Item Specification
Antenna input/output (J3)
50 ohm
Impedance
Simplex: 155.000 to 163.600 MHz
Sem-Duplex: 155.400 to 158.000 MHz
RX frequency
160.000 to 163.600 MHz
Duplex: 160.600 to 162.100 MHz
1st RX IF frequency 51.2375 MHz
2nd RX IF frequency (RX IF OUT) 37.5 kHz, -60 to +10 dBm output
Fo + 51.2375 MHz TP1 level: +4 to +6 dBm
VCO control voltage (TP2):
RX 1st Local frequency
165 MHz: 4.5 to 6.2 V
155 MHz: more than 3.1 V
RX 2nd Local frequency 51.2 MHz (0 dBm, 50 ohm) TP4 level: +4 to +6 dBm
RX sensitivity Input level of SINAD 20 dB is below 0 dBuV
Simplex: 155.000 to 161.475 MHz
TX frequency Sem-Duplex: 155.000 to 158.000 MHz
Duplex: 156.025 to 157.425 MHz
TX 1st Local frequency Fo + 45 MHz
Maximum TX output Over 40W (board output)
APC Controls from 0 W to the maximum
Maximum frequency division Within 5 kHz
Spurious Emission Less than 0.25 uW (9 kHz~2GHz)

5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

RX CIRCUIT
The Rx signal reduce out-of-band signals/noise between 156.025 MHz and 162.025
MHz by BPF (L/C) on Q7 input/output circuit and Q7 (RF AMP) will amplify it by
10dB. CR 104 is 1st MIXER circuit that converts RX signal by 1st Local of Fo+51.2375
MHz into 1st IF signal of 51.2375 MHz.
Fo - (Fo+51.2375 MHz) = 51.2375 MHz
1st IF signal, after being amplified by Q6 and Q111, will be converted by 2nd MIXER
circuit of CR106 and 2nd local of 51.2 MHz. 51.2 MHz is created by multiplying
reference frequency of 25.6 MHz received from CPU board by 2 on U11.
51.2375 MHz - 51.2 MHz = 37.5 kHz
This signal of 37.5 kHz is inputted into CPU board as RX IF OUT signal and is
demodulated with CODEC and DSP. AGC is a circuit that controls CR9 and CR13 (pin
diode) when AGC voltage is inputted from CPU board. However, since this voltage is
always set to 1.1 V regardless of RX input level, technically, AGC is not being used.

TX/RX IF out:
- measures no modulation signal input with J9 - #27 on TX RX board
SP SINAD:
- measures SP output (1 W) of 1 kHz/70 % MOD.

20dB

10 2.4Vrms
Level(dBm)

0 0.77Vrms

TX/RX IF out
-10

-20
SINAD(dB)

-30

7.7mVrms
-40

-50

-60 SP SINAD

--10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110dBuV


SSG Level

Fig. 5.4.6 Input/Output(RX) characteristic on TX/RX Board

5-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

TX CIRCUIT
A signal of 45 MHz inputted from CPU board is a FM-compatible signal modulated by
DDS on CPU board. This modulated signal is amplified by U10 and U5. Then, it is
converted by TX local frequency of Fo + 45 MHz of PLL output frequency on CR101
into Fo.
(Fo + 45 MHz) – 45 MHz = Fo
This output signal goes through Q101, BPF (L/C), Q5 and Q1. Its signal is amplified by
U1 (RA35H1516M). When PA input is anywhere between 20 to 50 mW will be over 40
W.

RA35H1516M
(154 MHz to 162 MHz, 40 W RF MOS-FET AMP Module)

(2) (3) (1): RF Input(Pin)


(5) At following condition;
(1)
(4)
(5) (2): Gate Voltage(VGG)
VDD=12.5V, VGG=5V, Pin=50 mW
(3): Drain Voltage(VDD)
(1) (2) (3) (4) - Output: more than 40 W
(4): RF Output(Pout)
- Efficiency: more than 50 %
(5): RF Ground(Case)
- 2nd harmonic: less than –50 dBc

Table 5.4.4 RA35H1516M

Item Conditions Maximum range


VDD VGG<5 V 17 VDC
VGG VDD<12.5 V, Pin=0 mW 6 VDC
Pin/Pout 154-162 MHz, Zin/out=50 ohm Pin=100 mW, Pout=50 W
T case -30 - +110 deg.

PA output goes through T/R SW circuit (CR2) and LPF structured on LC to reduce
spurious emissions. Cut-off frequency for LPF is 190 MHz and it is reduced by less than
-40 dB with 2 x Fo. Therefore, maintained spurious emissions are kept less then -80
dB(less then 0.25 uW) by LPF and PA(2nd harmonic: less then –50 dB). This output line
is connected to antenna terminal via CM coupler on U2 (DSC3D2D_0157). CM coupler
detects R VSWR and F VSWR. Power control is carried out on the basis comparison
between this signal and PWR CONT voltage from CPU board. R-VSWR functions as a
protector at the time of opening an antenna and an antenna being in a state of short(R
VSWR>F VSWR).

5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

APC, R VSWR, F VSWR CIRCUIT

Rx
CM Coupler Driver
Tx out (4) (1)
U2 T/R PA
(DCS3D20) LPF Q1
SW U1(RA35H1516M)

(2) VGG (3) VDD


T15V Q1:Driver Bias
PWR CONT
Q102

Q1:Driver Bias Q2

T15V

Q11 UN LOCK
Q10 (From U12: PLL IC)
T15V1 CPU
TEST ON Q8
05P0773
Not used

U30
CPU
U4 TEST ON
F-VSWR DET - +
Not used
(1/2)
CR8 R52 PWR CONT DA
U3(1/2) U4

R-VSWR DET
CR103 CPU
CR6, 5
U3(2/2)
F VSWR
R VSWR AD

TX/RX EEPROM
05P0774

Fig. 5.4.7 APC Block

These power data set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> TX POWER: is inputted into U4
(1/2): inversion amplifier. This voltage is a reference voltage of U4. One the other hand,
F-VSWR detected by CM coupler is detected by CR8 (half-wave detection) and is
amplified by U3 (1/2). R-VSWR is detected by CR5 and 6 (full-wave detection) and is
amplified on U3 (2/2). For example, when PWR CONT inputted into U4 (1/2) is lower
than F-VSWR voltage, U4 (1/2) output decreases. It lowers the base current of Q10 and
goes through Q2 to lower VGG of U1: and PA output. As a result, F-VSWR voltage
decreases as well. This voltage is the same as PWR CONT and continues until it reaches
voltage value.

5-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

Measured
CH16 Low Power Hi Power
Power Data 45 161
PWR CONT 0.54 V 1.93 V
F VSWR 0.65 V 3.04 V
Power 0.75 W 21.2 W

Fig. 5.4.8 VGG vs Output Power

TEMPERATURE DETECTION
When the temperature sensor: U13 (LM60CIM3) detects 60 degrees, it automatically
reduces TX output to 14W. This output is the value adjusted by [MENU] -> SYSTEM
-> TX POWER -> “TEMP.REDUCE”. The output voltage of this sensor is calculated by
Vo = 6.25 mv/deg. x Tc deg.

PA

U13 (LM60CIM3)

Fig. 5.4.9 TX/RX Board Temperature Sensor Location

5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.4 DUPLEXER
Duplexer is to be installed in FM-8800D. TX is composed in LPF and RX in HPF.
Estimated attenuation of effective frequency range for both from TX range to RX range
and RX range to TX range is approximately -60 to -70 dB. Since RX signal of simplex
channel attenuates in DUPLEXER, FM-8800D receives RX of duplex channels on DUP
RX board and RX of simplex channel on TX/RX board.

TX/RX
DUP RX
05P0774 (05P0777)
Rx RF

T/R DUPLEXER
PA SW
J1 : DUP OUT
TX FIL
SIMPLEX J2 : DUP IN 1
(JUMPER)
RX FIL R/T ANT
J4 : DUP IN 2

U2 J3 : ANT R/T ANT

Fig. 5.4.10 DUPLEXER Connection Diagram

TX FIL part (LPF)


- Frequency Range : 156.0 to 157.5 MHz
- Insertion Loss : Within 1.8 dB
- Attenuation of Signal : 160.6 MHz/‐59.3 dB, 161.5 MHz/‐66 dB,
162 MHz/‐60.5 dB
RX FIL part (HFP)
- Frequency Range : 160.6 to 162.1 MHz
- Insertion Loss : Within 1.8 dB
- Attenuation of Signal : 156 MHz/‐65 dB, 157.5 MHz/‐65 dB

5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

Below chart shows Return Loss and Attenuation characteristic.


Carry out +1.8 dB off-set

Return Loss

Attenuation

Fig. 5.4.11 DUPLEXER, RX FIL characteristic

Return Loss

Attenuation

Fig. 5.4.12 DUPLEXER, TX FIL characteristic

5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.5 CPU (05P0773)


+5V
J5
Wing
U42 Handset MIC
HANDSET MIC
Remote
Line IN
U16 Handset SP
LPF U6
Wing SP1
Wing SP2
U5 LPF Remote
U5 Line OUT
SP Connector
U16

J2: IEC61162/REMOTE
LPF U12 EXT SP
Wing handset MIC TDA2003

Remote Line OUT


SP
Remote Line IN
T1
U9
Handset MIC
LPF U4 VDR AF
25.6MHz

VDR AF
EXT SP
HS SP
TCXO
Y1: U37 EEPROM
25.6 MHz U29
(AT26BV256) Q2 EXT Alarm
J13
U37 U37 D-RAM
U31 U15,14
J3 For CLK (IC41LV16100S)
U37 - CPU NMEA TXD/RXD IEC61162-1
CODEC

- DSP I/F (NMEA)


- DDS KEY ALM
J11 Divider - CODEC
Q10 U37 SYNC U13
U33 Timing SCLKD
BIT CLK
(AK4543)

U39, 40 RS-485 DATA A/B


DATA A/B
1/2 x3 I/F
U10

DSP CLK
25.6MHz
25.6MHz
38.4MHz

38.4MHz Wing handset MIC1, 2 PTT Wing Handset


MIC1, 2 PTT
CHK DDS

CH70 RX Loop
back
05P0775

J1: Printer
U1, 2, 3, 8
CH70 TEST
CENTRONICS
(ADSP2186NBST320)

I/F Printer
J1 CH70 IF OUT(37.5kHz)
U18
CODEC

SEL U11 (HD64F2377)


U22
(AK4528VF)

U20

AGC CONT
U30

KEY
U17
DUP RX IF OUT(37.5kHz)
TX/RX IF OUT(37.5kHz)

DSP

RESET
AGC CONT

U34 PANNEL
CPU (H8S)

U36 05P0772
BPF
(S1D13704F00A)
DDS Parallel
U43 U25 to LCD
(AD9834BRU) Serial CONT
U36 LCD
45MHz
U21,24 LED BRGT
(Modulated) DSP CLK (EW50343FLWP)
VADJ
38.4MHz
CR6
POW. CONT.
TX ON PLL DATA CHECK
RX ON PLL STB1 Alarm
J7 TEST ON PLL CLK
TX/RX SQ VR
TX/RX IF OUT
05P0774
25.6MHz R. VSWR PA TEMP SQ Auto
F. VSWR PLL1 UNLOCK
J8
AF Vol
PLL DATA
DUP RX PLL STB2 PWR SW POW
IF OUT PLL CLK RX ON
DUP RX
05P0777 CH1
CH
25.6MHz CH2 nob
PLL2 UNLOCK
J2 DUP INST SCLK
+1.9V SIO Enter Push to
+1.9V AVR RTC CE Enter
For
- DSP U23, Q8,
CR16 05P0804
Handset Hook SW
+5V +15V
+3.3V Handset PTT
For +3.3V AVR HANDSET
- CPU U28 Handset MIC &
- Logic ICs
+3.3V1
PWR Handset SP HANGER
+3.3V AVR +5V AVR PWR SW
For U27 U25 05P0776
- D-RAM +15V
- EEPROM

Note;
RTC board is installed in the Russian Ver.,

Fig. 5.4.13 CPU Block Diagram

5-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

MEMORY CONTENTS
Memory configurations are as follow.

U30 U20
CPU(H8S) DSP
U31
DRAM
DM
FROM (Data)

U29 RAM
EEPROM (Program)
SRAM

Fig. 5.4.14 Memory Configurations

Table 5.4.5 Memories

Memory Function
Program storage domain
- Boot loader program
- CPU program
FROM U30: CPU (H8S) BUILT-IN - DSP program (forwarded from CPU to DSP)
- Letter indication font
- CH frequency table
- SQ curb table
Storage domain of data at the time of carrying out a
SRAM U30: CPU (H8S) BUILT-IN
program
Storage domain of data at the time of carrying out a
program
DRAM U31: 1M x 16 bits - TX/RX message data, etc
- Data buffer of print output
- Stack (CPU work area)
Storage domain of system parameter
- System setup value
EEPROM U29: 256 kbits - The state of radio equipments
- Log
- Message file
Storage domain of program code
U20: - Program code
DM
DSP BUILT-IN CODE RAM - Filter co-efficient of modulation and
demodulation
Storage domain of data at the time of carrying out a
program
U20:
RAM - Data
DSP BUILT-IN DATA RAM
- Buffer
- Gain table of AL Vol and SQ Vol

5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

TCXO
TCXO(Temperature Compensate Crystal Oscillators) PLL reference frequency and of
TX/RX board and DUP RX board is created based on TCXO of Y1: 25.6 MHz/+5ppm.
There is no specific part where frequency is adjusted. If TX frequency tolerance is over
+10 ppm, replace CPU board or TCXO. 38.4 MHz is created by multiplying 25.6 MHz
by 3 on Q10 and is divided by 2 on U33. Frequency gained through this is used for
clock of DSP (CLK Max. 50 MHz).

45MHz
TX/RX
05P0774 J7

25.6MHz
For PLL Ref.
J8

DUP RX
05P0777
25.6MHz
For PLL Ref.
TCXO
J2 Y1: U37
25.6 MHz

25.6MHz J13
U37 U37
CH70 RX 25.6MHz J3 For CLK
U37 - CPU
05P0775 - DSP
- DDS
38.4MHz J11 Divider - CODEC
For 2nd Lo Q10 U37
U33
J1
1/2 x3

For DSP CLK: 38.4MHz

Fig. 5.4.15 Standard Oscillation Circuit

MODULATION
Below block diagram shows the process where modulation is carried out in DSP.

LINE IN U10: CODEC


Wing Hanset SDATA OUT
A/D
Handset MIC

Control

U20: DSP
50kHz 8.3kHz
Voice Data
LPF Pre-emphasis
45MHz 50kHz DDS setting Calculation:
U25: DDS Pre-emphasis
data output DDS setting data
SEL

Enable/unenable
50kHz

300kHz
U30:
50kHz
DDS Fo Select FSK data(0/1) CPU
FSK MOD Calculation:
FSK data(B/Y)
Select

Control

Fig. 5.4.16 Modulation Process

5-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

Audio signal from the Transceiver handset, Remote handsets, and Wing MIC are
digitized on U10: CODEC (A/D conversion) and is inputted into U20: DSP. DSC TX
message is inputted into DSP from U30: CPU. These data are processed in DSP as DDS
setup data. Although a signal of FM-modulated 45 MHz is outputted from DDS (9 x 5
MHz) , this signal uses a high frequency that is 9 times higher than reference frequency
of DDS which is 5 MHz.

DEMODULATION
IF signal (-60 to +10 dBm) of 37.5 kHz from TX/RX board and DUP RX board goes
through U22 and limiter circuit of CR4. Then, it is amplified by differential amplifier
consisting of U11 and is inputted into U17: CODEC.
IF signal (-60 to +10 dBm) of 37.5 kHz from CH70 RX board goes through limiter
circuit of CR7 and is amplified by differential amplifier consisting of U18. Then it is
inputted into U17: CODEC. Below block diagram shows the demodulation process
carried out in DSP.

EXT SP U10: Control


VDR SP CODEC
HS SP
REM LINE OUT
D/A

FM DEMOD OUT(Voice)
FM DEMOD (Voice)

(TR Handset, TR SP)


(LINE OUT/VDR)
Select Control

FSK DEMOD De-emphasis


Enable/unenable Enable/unenable
Loop back Loop
back
50kHz
CH70 IF OUT 100kHz
SEL

BPF DEMOD LPF HPF/BPF De-emphasis Mute


A/D IF Sig.
TX/RX IF OUT
100kHz
DUP RX IF OUT

SQ DET. U30:
CPU
Separator
U17: (Noise/Sig.)
6kHz
CODEC Judgment FSK Sig.
FSK DEMOD LPF (0 or 1) Sampling

DET.
Voice spectrum SQ Cont.

SQ VR data, SQ auto, SQ off


DET.
(IF Sig. level)
Reciveing level(ANT Bar IND.)

ATT
(AGC Cont.) Calculation:
D/A ATT ADJ.
ATT
Not used

U20: DSP

Fig. 5.4.17 DSP function Diagram

5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

SQ/Auto SQ FUNCTION
SQ FUNCTIONS are below;
- Threshold level : -3 to –6 dBuV (approximately SINAD 12 dB)
- Tight level : below +6 dB
CAUTION:
SQ auto function is the position of SQ volume at around 7 o'clock. Note that
dose not control audio spectrum as FM-8500 does.
SQ control is carried out in SQ Cont inside DSP shown in Fig. 5.4.17. SQ function is
based on a ratio between the level of audio range and the level of noise range. For
example, there will be no audio signal when the level of audio range and the level of
noise range are the same. Inputting audio signal will increase the level of audio range
and suppresses the level of noise range.

A ratio table (SINAD) of noise and signal is made beforehand and the level that controls
each detected level and the level with which they are controlled from the position of SQ
volume. You can check the level of noise range and the level of signal range by
selecting [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> TEST -> TX/RX STATUS and checking RX IF
LEVEL and RX AF NOISE. Refer to page 8-15.

37.5kHz 37.5kHz

Noise area
Noise area

8kHz
50kHz 8kHz
25kHz 50kHz
+12.5kHz 25kHz
Signal area +12.5kHz
Signal area

No signal When there is a signal, signal level increases and noise level
is suppressed. Noise range is within the level ranging from
8 kHz up to 25 kHz.

Fig. 5.4.18 Signal Range and Noise Range

SQ Cont: Refer to Fig. 5.4.17.


SQ control is a MUTE circuit of FM DEMOD OUT (Voice) line. This signal is
outputted into the Handset era-speaker and SP of the Transceiver unit. FM DEMOD
(Voice) line is the output of Remote Handset's LINE OUT and VDR OUT, therefore, SQ
control is not carried out here.

SQ control for a Remote Handset;


SQ level set up on the Remote Handsets side goes through DATA line and controls this
circuit: SQ Cont. A signal (SQ) that controls MUTE circuit is sent to the Remote
Handset side and controls the sound there.

5-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

ANTENNA BAR INDICATION


This indicates ratio (SNAD) between the level of audio range and the level of noise
range. Just as SQ control, they are detected by SQ Cont inside DSP.
Adequate SINAD conversions of AF output are below.
- No antenna indication : no signal received.
- One antenna : below 20 dB SINAD
- Two antennas : 20 dB to 40 dB SINAD
- Three antennas : over 40 dB SINAD

COMMUNICATION WITH REMOTE HANDSETS


Communication between the Transceiver unit and a Remote Handsets are carried out
using RS-485.
The communication speed is 57.6 kbps/asynchronous communication and is carried out
with multi-processor function. With this equipment, polling is carried out at all times
towards each Remote Handset to monitor the state of it. For example, when any key on
a Remote Handset is pressed, a responding action will be carried out on the Transceiver
unit side and also sends its control command to the Remote Handset.

MULTI-PROCESSOR FUNTION
This is a function installed in H8S CPU. This function allows the shared use of
communication line between multiple CPUs and TX/RX of data through asynchronous
serial communication by adding multi-processor unit to it.

Polling FM-8800S, D Polling


CPU
(H8S)

Reply DATA A, B

CPU CPU ID=1 CPU ID=2 CPU ID=3 CPU ID=4


(H8S) (H8S) (H8S) (H8S) (H8S)

DMC I/F Remote Handset Remote Handset Remote Handset Remote Handset
(IF-8820) (HS-8800) (HS-8800) (HS-8800) (HS-8800)

Start Stop Start Stop


1 bit ID data MPB bit bit Data MPB bit 1

0 D0 D2 D3 D7 1 1 0 D0 D2 D3 D7 0 1 idling

MPB: Multi Processer Bit


Note;
Connection of DMC I/F cannot
be performed in the Russian Ver.

Fig. 5.4.19 Multi-Processor Unit

5-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

For this communication to be in use, proper ID number has to be set up for each CPU.
Refer to page 4-4 for this ID setup. ID for DMC IF unit is fixed. Data is composed of ID
transmitting cycle that designates the Receiving station (a Remote Handset) and a data
transmitting cycle that responds to Receiving station. When a multi-processor bit is ''1''
that means ID transmitting cycle and ''0'' means data receiving cycle.

For example, a Transmitting station (the Transceiver unit) transmits a data with ID code
of a Receiving station with multi-processor bit “1” followed by data with
multi-processor bit “1”. When a Receiving station receives a data with multi-processor
bit “1”, it compares it with its own ID to make sure before accepting it.

COMMUNICATION WITH DMC-5


Connection of DMC I/F cannot be performed in the Russian Ver.
A communication between DMC IF and DMC-5 is made possible using MIF command.
A communication between DMC IF and the Transceiver unit uses FM-8800S/D
communication protocol so does a Remote Handset. Therefore, in order to establish a
communication between the Transceiver unit and DMC-5, DMC IF transfers a
command from DMC-5 to FM-8800S/D and the same transfer of command can be done
the other way around as well.

FM-8800S, D

CPU
(H8S)

DATA A, B

DATA A, B

CPU TXD CPU CPU ID=1 CPU ID=4


(H8S) (V25) (H8S) (H8S)
RXD
DMC I/F Remote Handset Remote Handset
(IF-8820) (MIF Comand) DMC-5 (HS-8800) (HS-8800)

Fig. 5.4.20 DMC-5 Connection Diagram

5-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.6 PWR (05P0776)


This outputs the voltage of +15 VDC from +24 VDC input power. Each protection
circuit and their functions are as below.

U1: CBS2002415
TB1 C1-7 C8-10 L3 L4
+15V J1-#1-3
+IN +Vout
24VDC(+)
C11,12 C14,15
L1
TB2 L2 J1-#6-8
0V
-IN -Vout
24VDC(-) RC
AVR
CR1 R7,9 (+12V)
FG

R5 Voltage
K1 DET.
CR4 U2: M51958BFP
02CZ39 R8
R3 C23
AVR
(+12V)
Q3
Q1: 2SD1271A Q2
PWR SW P J1-#4
CR2: 02CZ12Y
PWR SW M J1-#5
PWR
05P0776 POWER SW

Fig. 5.4.21 PWR Block Diagram

OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION


This protection functions to stop the output when power input is anywhere between +42
to +43 VDC and also functions as an automatic recovery function. This detects voltage
on CR4 and controls power relay: K1 through Q 2 and Q3.

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTION


This protection functions to stop the power output when the power input is anywhere
between +14 to +15 VDC. Detected voltage is determined by voltage divider(between R
7/9 and R 8) and its voltage is used to control U2. Normally, 300 ms after turning on the
power, level will be “L” and sets U1 to “ON”.

RUSH CURRENT PROTESTION


When you turn on the power, K1 will be set to “ON” and then, RC (Remote Control) on
U1 will be set to “ON”. Delay of RC terminal will depend on C23 on U2.
Approximately 300 ms after turning on the power, level will change to “L”. If you turn
on the power without proper adjustment with RC terminal (RC=L level), rush current
will be discharged into U1 and might burn where K1 is connected. This protection
prevents rush current at the time of inserting RC power by adjusting RC terminal to “L”
level 300 ms after turning on the power.

5-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

OVER CURRENT PROTECTION ON U1


This protection functions to stop the output when U1 output current increases more than
14 A and also functions as an automatic recovery function.

LOW VOLTAGE OUTPUT PROTECTION ON U1


This protection functions to stop the output when the voltage is over +17 VDC.
Turn off the power temporarily when this happens.

OVER HEATING PROTECTION ON U1


This protection functions to stop the output when the temperature on module plate
reaches over 100 degrees and also functions as an automatic recovery function.

5-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

5.4.7 HS CONT (05P0781)


CPU on HS CONT board responds to the polling from the Transceiver unit and sends
out the information. For example, handset is OFF HOOK etc.
CPU on the Transceiver unit responds to it and carries out appropriate actions and sends
a command to the Remote Handset CPU at the time of responding. Remote Handset
CPU will carry out a command from the Transceiver unit and displays it.

U14 (EEROM) on HS CONT board stores ID number, dimmer, and contrast of a


Remote Handset.

RS-485
Driver/Receiver
EEROM TXD
U3 J2-#1,2 DATA A/B
U14 RXD
SN75LBC1790R
(CAT25C16S) J2-#3 CONT
DTMF
LCD Mulutiplexer
Module DIM Cont. 3bits R34
MFM07Q10 X1
Reset Y1
A/B Line in
C X0 J2-#7,8
U5
CPU Xcom Handset MIC
Ycom
Y0 U1
SW PCB Scan out 3bits LINE
Zcom Z0
(05P0715) Scan in 8bits U2
Z1
(HD64F3067RF) R45
U13 Earspeaker
Reset (TC4053)
Q5, 6
(Handset)
R35
Flash ROM:128k U4 Mute
Y1 RAM:4k
18.432MHz UART:3ch 2bits
ICU:6ch
Hook senser PIO:79 J2-#5,6 Line out
U5
U12
(DN6848S) Vol. CONT. Loudspeaker
Key click tone IN2
IN1 (Handfree)
PTT SW
Vol. Cont. 32step CLK OUT1
U7
S1 DATA OUT2
U6(M62429) Distress switch
J2-#4

+5V J2-#9 +15V


U8
TA7805F

+5V1 +9V U9
AN77L09M

Reset U11 U10


HS CONT
M51953 TA7805F
05P0781

Fig 5.4.22 HS CONT Block Diagram

5-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.4 Block Description

U13 is IC that switches MIC and SP line. There are two different switch functions as
below.
- X and Y (linked function) : switch between a normal state and DTMF(Not used)
-Z : ON/OFF switch of loud speaker.

Mulutiplexer

U13: TC4053

A
B U5 Line in
C
X0 Xcom
U2: Earspeaker
U4 Mute
CPU (Handset)
X1

R34 U6 Loudspeaker
Vol. U7
CONT. (Handfree)
Z0 Zcom

Z1

U1 Handset MIC
Y0
Ycom
U5 Line out
Y1
DTMF

Fig. 5.4.23 MIC/SP Switching Block Diagram

5-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 6. Measurement
6.1 Adjustment

6.1 Adjustment
6.1.1 Output Power
Adjusts output power for HI, LOW and TEMP REDUCE. Adjustment procedure for
FM-8800D and FM-8800S are the same. Power Data are curried out on the selected
channels and they are not memorized separately for each channel. Therefore, make an
adjustment with intermediate channel (CH14) of VHF.
- HI: 25 W (IEC standard is within 0 dB, –3 dB)
- LOW: Less than 1 W
- TEMP. REDUCE: Adjusts to 14W with output when the temperature sensor in
TX/RX board detects 60 degrees.

Antenna

Handset 50 ohm
ANT Dummy

FM-8800S
FM-8800D or
50 ohm
CH70 ANT Power meter

Fig. 6.1.1 Output Measurement Circuit

Procedure
1. Set to CH14.

2. Call up the option menu. Refer to page 4-1.


- Make a jumper connection between #2 and #15 on [Printer] port
- Or, jumper connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810
- Press [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> Input the password

3. Select TX POWER and press [ENT] key. Pop-up window will appear as below.

* TX POWER *
HI
LOW
TEMP. REDUCE

6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.1 Adjustment

4. Select output to set up and press [ENT] key.


e.g. Select “HI” and press [ENT] key. Pop-up window will appear as below.

POWER Setup
HI PWR (0 – 255)
<■■■■ > 127
EXT: ENT

5. Press PTT switch and adjust output power by turning Channel Knob while checking
output power.

6. Press [ENT] key to store output setup power data.

7. Carry out the procedure from step 3 to adjust “LOW” and “TEPM REDUCE”.

8. Turn off the power.

NOTE:
The following figure shows for Power Data vs Output Power. (The following value
varies Transceiver unit.) Adjustments of “HI”, “LOW” and “TEMP. REDUCE” are the
same curve and they can be adjusted respectively.

Power
45 W Reference only
FM-8800S
40

35

30 FM-8800D
25W
25

20
14W Default setting of Power data
15 (Russian Ver, ,and
INTL Ver. 03.01 and after)
10 1W - HI: 170
- LOW: 44
5 - TEMP. REDUCE: 134

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 255

Power data

Fig. 6.1.2 Power Data vs. Output Power

6-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2 Measurement
6.2.1 VHF Frequency
As a reference oscillator for this equipment, TCXO (Temperature Compensated Crystal
Oscillators) is used. And there is no adjustment part of frequency.
Regulated range of frequency tolerance is within +10 ppm (+1.5 kHz approximately). If
the tolerance is more/less than +10 ppm, replace CPU board or Y1 (TCXO: 25.6 MHz)
on CPU board.

Connect the frequency counter as below. Read the frequency of the setup channel when
PTT switch is ON.

The frequency tolerance: within +10 ppm


Antenna

Handset 50 ohm
ANT Dummy

FM-8800S
FM-8800D or
50 ohm
CH70 ANT Power meter
Freq. Counter

The input to a frequency counter approximates the pick-up coil to a


dummy load or ANT coaxial cable and picks up TX frequency.

Fig. 6.2.1 Frequency Measurement

6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2.2 CH70 Output


As CH70 is assigned to DSC channel, it cannot be selected as normal channel can be.
See diagrams in Fig. 6.1.1 and 6.2.1 of the output power and the frequency for CH70.
Note that there is no output power adjustment only for CH70.

Procedure
1. Any channel may be selected.

2. Refer to page 4-1. Call up the option menus.


- Make a jumper connection between #2 and #15 on [Printer] port
- Or, jumper connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810
- Press [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> Input the password

3. Select “TONE TEST” and press [ENT] key. Pop-up window will appear as below.
CH70 is automatically selected when going into this mode.

* Tone Test Menu * - POWER: Sets HI/LOW Power


POWER HI - DSC: Changes DSC/ATIS
DSC (either has different modulation index)
MARK - MARK: 1300 Hz
SPACE - SPACE: 2100 Hz
DOT - DOT: Modulated by Mark/Space Tone 1200 bps
- CARRIER: No modulation
CARRIER

4. In the Tone Test Menu above, select “HI” or “LOW” for POWER, “DSC” for DSC,
and select “CARRIER”.
5. When PTT switch is ON, “CH70” is outputted. Then, take a measurement of output
power and the frequency tolerance.

6. Turn off the power.

6-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2.3 DSC Tone Frequency

In the FM-8800 program: INTL Ver.03.01 and after /Russian ver., TONE
selected from a speaker is outputted when TONE TEST is performed in the
“6.2.2 CH70 Output”.

In case of the INTL Ver.02.03 and before for the FM-8800 program
No checkpoint in Mark and Space Tone. Therefore, when confirming the tone frequency,
monitor the tone frequency by other VHF transceiver for CH70. The tone frequency
tolerance is within +10 Hz.
In this section, monitoring procedures with FM-8800S, D are described.

Antenna
Handset 50 ohm For Monitor
ANT Dummy ANT

FM-8800S FM-8800S SP
FM-8800D CH70 FM-8800D

CH70 ANT CH70 ANT

Freq. Counter
- MARK: 1300 Hz + 10 Hz
- SPACE: 2100 Hz + 10 Hz

Fig. 6.2.2 Tone Frequency Measurement Circuit

Procedure
*** FM 8800S/D preparation on the monitor side ***
1. Connect the frequency counter to the SP line.

2. Any channels may be selected.

3. Call up the option menus. Refer to page 4-1.


- Make a jumper connection between #2 and #15 on [Printer] port
- Or, jumper connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810
- Press [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> Input the password

4. Select T/A and press [ENT] key. Pop-up menus will appear as below.
CH70 is automatically received by CH70 RX board when going into this mode.
And the decoded CH70 signal is outputted to the SP.

DSC RX TEST NOTE:


Decoded signals are also
OUTPUT RX DSC DATA
outputted into NMEA-TX on
TO NMEA PORT
[IEC61162-1/REMOTE] port by
EXT:ENT
RS-422 level.

6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

*** FM 8800S/D preparation and transmission on the TX side ***


5. Any channel may be selected.

6. Call up the option menus. Refer to page 4-1.


- Make a jumper connection between #2 and #15 of [Printer] port
- Or, jumper connection between #25 and #26 of IF-8810
- Press [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> Input the password

7. Select “TONE TEST” and press [ENT] key. Pop-up window will appear as below.

* Tone Test Menu *


POWER HI
DSC
MARK
SPACE
DOT
CARRIER

8. In the Tone Test Menu above,


for example, select “LOW” for POWER, “DSC” for DSC, and select “MARK”. The
cursor is “MARK”.

9. When PTT switch is ON, CH70 is transmitted. (Modulated in Mark tone)

10. Check the Mark tone frequency by FM-8800S/D on the monitor side.
MARK tone frequency: 1300 Hz

11. After taking a measurement, go back to “Tone Test Menu” and select SPACE for the
tone frequency. The cursor is “Space”.

12. Check the Space tone frequency by FM-8800 S/D on the monitor side.
SPACE tone frequency: 2100 Hz

13. Turn off the power.

6-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2.4 Spurious Emission


Acceptable level for spurious emission is as below.
- 146 to 162.0375 MHz : 2.5 μW (less than -70 dB for 25 W)
- Other bands : 10 μW (less than -64 dB for 25 W)

Connect the spectrum analyzer to the antenna terminal of FM-8800S/D as below and
turn on PTT switch to take spurious emissions measurements.

Handset
ANT

FM-8800S Spectrum
FM-8800D Analyzer
50 ohm
ATT(30dB)
CH70 ANT

Fig. 6.2.3 Spurious Emissions Measurement

Fundamental signal
Measure

Spurious emission

Fig. 6.2.4 Spectrum Analyzer Panel

6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2.5 Frequency deviation for a radiotelephone


Connect FM Liner Detector as below. Connect AF OSC (AF Oscillator) and an
appropriate switch as a substitution to PTT switch.

50 ohm ATT 50 ohm


ANT (20dB) Dummy
Pick-up

HANDSET
FM-8800S
FM-8800D
3-4
AF OSC
600 ohm
CH70 ANT
FM Liner
1-2
Detector
PTT SW

Fig. 6.2.5 Measurement of Frequency Deviation

Procedure
1. Set up the frequency for AF OSC to 1 kHz. Modulation frequency: 1 kHz.
2. Turn on PTT switch.
3. Adjust the output level of AF OSC (Adjust the modulation level.) so that it may be set
up to Frequency Deviation: 3.5 kHz.
4. Measure the Frequency Deviation when the modulation level is increased +20 dB
from the above-mentioned AF OSC level.
Frequency Deviation is regulated to be within 5 kHz.

NOTE:
Frequency deviation (kHz)
Modulation Index (m) =
Modulation frequency (kHz)

6-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6.2 Measurement

6.2.6 Sensitivity of a radiotelephone: NQ method


Connect SSG as below.

ANT 4 ohm SP or
SP 4 ohm dummy
SSG 50 ohm
(Standard FM-8800S
Signal GEN.) FM-8800D
or
AF V.V

Fig. 6.2.6 Measurement of Receiving Sensitivity

Procedure
1. Set up SSG (Standard Signal Generator) as follows.
- Set up CH16 (156.8 MHz), for example.
- Modulation frequency: 1 kHz
- Frequency deviation: 3.5 kHz
2. Set up SSG output level to 20 dBuV and audio output of FM-8800S/D to
approximately 1W: 2 Vrms by AF VR.
3. Turn off SSG output in the above state and take a measurement of the FM-8800S/D
noise level. If the noise level is not 2 Vrms, adjust AF VR to 2 Vrms again.
4. Turn SSG to the non-modulation signal, and make an adjustment of SG level.
Find a point that FM-8800S/D audio output is -20 dB (0.2 Vrms)

IEC standard: Less than +6 dBuV


** FM-8800S/D: less than 0 dBuV

6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 7. Updating Program
7.1 Updating

7.1 Updating
7.1.1 Program file
This program consists of Transceiver unit (FM-8800S/D), Handset (HS-8800) and DMC
I/F (IF-8820). Main program is use with both FM-8800S and FM-8800D.
Program folder and their contents are indicated in the table below.

Table 7.1.1 Program File List

File Size Category


Deleted in Russian Ver.
DMCIF.BIN 11 KB BIN file
For DMC I/F program
BIN file
BIN 422
FMDSP.BIN Consists of H8S CPU and DSP program in
KB
Transceiver unit
BIN file
HAND.BIN 64 KB
For Remote Handset program
BIN file
LOADER FMLD.BIN 8 KB
Common with Loader program
Application file
COMDSP.EXE 92 KB File to carry out displaying update process of
Remote Handset and DMC I/F program
PROGRAM
Application file
189
UppgNT.exe Update file to carry out for Transceiver unit,
KB
Remote Handset and DMC I/F program
Batch file
UP8800.BAT 1 KB
For updating Main program
Batch file
UPHS.BAT 1 KB
For updating Remote Handset program
Deleted in Russian Ver.
UPIF.BAT 1 KB Batch file
For updating DMC I/F program
Text document
VER.txt 1 KB Display contents of a holder and the program
version.
* The size is an only reference.

Batch file
- UP8800.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥fmdsp.bin 0 0 1 0 1
- UPHS.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥hand.bin 0 0 1 3 1
program¥comdsp -c1 -b57600
- UPIF.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥dmcif.bin 0 0 1 4 1
program¥comdsp -c1 -b57600

7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.1 Updating

VER.txt file
1) In case of the INTL Ver.

“Program version” is indicated in VER.txt file.


e.g. If the program version is FM-8800 (MAIN),
the last two digits ”02” of “0550215-02.02”
indicate the detailed version.

Check the detailed program


numbers, see page 7-11.

2) In case of the Russian Ver.

---------------------------------------
<Program version> 2006.03.31
---------------------------------------
FM-8800(MAIN) 0550220-01.01 “Program version” is indicated in VER.txt file.
HS-8800(Handset) 0550221-01.01 e.g. If the program version is FM-8800 (MAIN),
--------------------------------------- the last two digits ”02” of “0550220-01.01”
indicate the detailed version.
--------------------------------------
<FM-8800 Update program file list>
--------------------------------------
FM8800_R
|
+--BIN-----+--fmdsp.bin
| +--hand.bin
|
+--LOADER--+--fmld.bin
|
+--PROGRAM-+--comdsp.exe
| +--uppgNT.exe
|
+--UP8800.BAT
+--UPHS.BAT

7-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.1 Updating

7.1.2 Note
1. For electrical specification
Electric specification of the communication port on FM-8800S/D side for updating a
program, is RS-422. Communication speed is 57.6 kbps.
Provide the RS-422 level converter with the specification more than 57.6 kbps. The
level converter (IC-485SN) for updating FA-100 is available.

2. If the serial port on the PC is anything other than [COM-1], update the batch file or
change the specified COM port to [COM-1] on the PC.

3. Where to connect PC varies with a program to be updated.

Connection port for the PC Program to update Remark


Transceiver unit #10: RX-C, #9: RX-H Main: Transceiver unit
[IEC61162/Remote] #8: TX-C, #7: TX-H (FM-8800S/D)
Main: Transceiver unit
Junction box (FM-8800S/D)
#1: TX-H, #2: TX-C
(IF-8810) Remote Handset
#3: RX-H, #4: RX-C Updating via
[TB-1] (HS-8800) NOTE
Transceiver unit
DMC I/F (IF-8820)

NOTE: Even if some Remote Handsets are connected, Remote Handset ID is automatically
recognized and updated from the lowest ID number. See page 4-6 for details.

4. “Port setting” for the serial port on the PC is unnecessary. When updating it , it is
automatically set from the UppgNT.exe.
- At the time of booting up the program: 9600 bps
- PC and Transceiver unit are communicated for updating: 57.6 kbps
- Communicates among Transceiver unit, Remote Handset and DMC I/F: 38.4 kbps
Then, Remote Handset and DMC I/F program are temporarily downloaded into the
memory of Transceiver unit and loaded respectively. The main program is directly
loaded in CPU(H8S) of Transceiver unit. The protocols are as below.

- Format - Data bit: 8 - Stop bit: 1


- Parity bit: None
- Flow control - None

7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.1 Updating

7.1.3 Setup
1. Connection
Set up the slide switch of IC-485SN as below when using the level converter
(IC-485SN).
- T-ON/R-ON side
- DCE side (FA-100 is on the DTE side.)

T-ON/R-ON

DCE

Fig. 7.1.1 Setting IC-485SN

Cable wiring between PC (9P) and IC-458SN (25P) is as below.


DSR, DTR and etc, cannot be used as the control signals. Connect TXD, RXD and
GND lines.

Table 7.1.2 Wiring 9–25 Pin D-Sub Cables

PC IC-458SN
9 Pin D-sub (Female) 25 Pin D-sub (Male)
2 TXD <--> 3 RXD
4 DSR <--> 20 DTR
3 RXD <--> 2 TXD
5 GND <--> 7 GND
6 DTR <--> 6 DSR
7 CTS <--> 4 RTS
8 RTS <--> 5 CTS
9 RI <--> 22 RI
1 DCD <--> 8 DCD

Frame Shield <--> Frame Shield

7-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.1 Updating

- Updating for Transceiver unit (FM-8800S/D)


IEC61162/Remote port
37 Pin D-sub

10.RxD-C 1. T+ Serial port


FM-8800S 25p
9.RxD-H 2. T- [COM-1]
FM-8800D IC-485SN PC
7.TxD-H 3. R-
8.TxD-C 4. R+ RS-232C 9p
RS-422 Straight Cable

Fig. 7.1.2 Case-1: Update Wiring FM-8800

- Updating Transceiver unit (FM-8800S/D),


Remote Handset (HS-8800) and DMC I/F (IF-8820)

IEC61162/Remote port
37 Pin D-sub Serial port
J1 4.RxD-C 1. T+ 25p
3.RxD-H 2. T- [COM-1]
FM-8800S J2 IC-485SN PC
1.TxD-H 3. R-
FM-8800D 9p
J3 2.TxD-C 4. R+ RS-232C
RS-422 Straight Cable

(HS-8800)

(HS-8800)
Handset

Handset
Junction box
IF-8810
Remote Station

Remote Station
(RB-8800/8810)

(RB-8800/8810)
30/31
DATA-A/B Max. 4 sets

TB-1

Same as Remote Station


above (RB-8800/8810)
40/41
(IF-8820)

&
DMC I/F

DATA-A/B
Handset
(HS-8800)
DMC-5

Connection of the unit surrounded by the dotted line cannot be


performed in Russian Ver.,

Fig 7.1.3 Case-2: Update Wiring FM-8800, HS-8800 and IF-8820

7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.1 Updating

2. Changing batch files


1) Checking PC’s COM port number:
Open [Control PANEL] –> [System] –> [Device Manager] and check COM port
number. (e.g. COM3 the installed USB - RS-232C Driver)
2) Select the updating batch file and open the batch file from [File] – “Edit”.
3) Change the underlined digit of each batch file to PC’s COM port digit.

- UP8800.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥fmdsp.bin 0 0 1 0 1
- UPHS.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥hand.bin 0 0 1 3 1
program¥comdsp -c1 -b57600
- UPIF.BAT
program¥uppgNT loader¥fmld.bin bin¥dmcif.bin 0 0 1 4 1
program¥comdsp -c1 -b57600

e.g. If the batch file is UP8800.BAT,


change “-------- bin¥fmdsp.bin00101” to “00103”.

If the batch file is “UPHS.BAT”,


change “---- bin¥hand.bin 0 0 1 3 1” to 0 0 1 3 3
“program¥comdsp -c1 -b57600” to c3

As for UPIF.BAT,
it is the same as UPHS.BAT.
4) Select [File] and [Save] for the edited text.
If it is unsuccessful, right click on the batch file icon and select [Property] ->
[General]. For [Attribution], make sure that there is no check mark in “Read Only”
box.

7-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Updating Procedure

7.2 Updating Procedure


7.2.1 Procedure
1. Turn off Transceiver unit and connect the PC to the Junction Box (IF-8810) or
Transceiver unit. See page 7-4 for setup.
2. Open the FM UP program holder. (Russian Ver: FM8800 R)
3. Double click the batch file icon for the update program.

FM8800S, FM8800D DMC I/F: IF-8820

Handset: HS-8800

4. MS-DOS window appears. Turn on Transceiver unit when TARGET POWER ON


appears.

Port No.

TARGET POWER ON

7-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Updating Procedure

5. Update program starts automatically. During updating, there is no indication shown in


LCD of Transceiver unit and Remote Handset. However, the “ALARM” LED of
Remote Handset light.
If a normal display is shown on LCD, check the connection and try again from the
step 2.

6. After updating a program, a normal display is shown on LCD.


Updating time is as below.

- Main (UP8800.BAT) : approximately 5 minutes


- Remote Handset (UPHS.BAT):
approximately 1 minute for transferring a file
approximately 0.5 minutes for loading time per unit
- DMC IF (UPIF.BAT) : approximately 0.5 minutes

7. Turn off the power.

Reference) Update screen

Status of updating process (%)

Fig. 7.2.1 Screen for Update Program of Main Unit

7-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Updating Procedure

} Transfer the program from the PC into


the memory of Transceiver unit.

} Remote 30: Updating Handset ID=1

} Remote 32: Updating Handset ID=3

Complete updating

Fig. 7.2.2 Screen of Updating Handset Program

} Transfer the program from the PC into


the memory of Transceiver unit.

} Remote 40: Updating DMC I/F

Complete updating

Fig. 7.2.3 Screen of Updating DMC IF Program

7-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Updating Procedure

7.2.2 Check the detailed program number


1. Make a jumper between #2 and #15 of [PRINTER] port. Or, jumper connection
between #25 and #26 of IF-8810. See page 4-1.

15 [PRINTER]

2. Press [Menu] key and select “SYSTEM” and then, followed by [ENT] key.

3. Input the password “xxxxxx” to go to the option menu.

xxxxxx

“ ▼ ” mark: You can open all


system setup menus.

4. Select “TEST” from SYSTEM SETUP MENU display and press [ENT] key to go to
TEST MENU.

5. Select “CPU” and press [ENT] key to go to CPU TEST.

6. Select “PROG.VER” and press [ENT] key to bring up the PROGRAM VERSION.

PROGRAM VERSION

FM-8800 : 0550215-02
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Remote Handset version is displayed by the
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 lowest ID number of Handset ID.
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Version of the unconnected unit is not
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 displayed.
IF-8820 : 0550217-01

Note;
There is no IF-8820 in the Russian Ver.

7-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7.2 Updating Procedure

7. Press [SHIFT] key once and [1] key 5 times. The detailed program version
appears.

PROGRAM VERSION

FM-8800 : 0550215-02-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x The last 2 digits indicate the detailed version.
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x
IF-8820 : 0550217-01-0x

ITNL Ver.

PROGRAM VERSION

FM-8800 : 0550220-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x The last 2 digits indicate the detailed version.
HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
2006-01-25 20:11 Compiled time of the FM-8800
program is displayed.

Russian Ver.

7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 8. 8.1Maintenance
Self-test and Error Message

8.1 Self-test and Error Message


8.1.1 Daily test (Self-test)
Press [SHIFT] -> [TEST] key to carry out the test.

Test in progress
Distress Alarm, LED of [Distress] button lights and
LED of ALARM blinks. To be OFF, press
[CANCEL] key
** DAILY TEST **

TX POWER : OK
When PTT switch is not pressed before
TX/RX PCB : OK the test, “NO CHECK” appears.
CPU PCB : OK
CH70 RX PCB : OK
DUP RX PCB : OK Displays only FM-8800D

1. TX POWER
This test stores the last minute state of TX output (F-VSWR and R-VSWR) before the
self-test in memory and checks to see if the output value is over the designated value or
not. Press PTT switch with Hi power before carrying out the self-test and stores the state
of TX output memory.
If you turn on the power and carry out a self-test without transmitting at all, ‘’NO
CHECK’’ will appear. If the output is less than 8 W, ‘’NG’’ will appear which means
there is a problem with either PA module or TX/RX board (05P0774A, B).

- OK/NG indication: assessed by approximately 8 W.


OK means over approximately 8 W.
- NO CHECK: indicated with self-test is carried out with no transmission.

TX/RX
PA
CM Coupler RA35H1516M DRIVE 05P0774A, B CPU
Tx out
U2 05P0773
(DCS3D20) U1 Q1,5

PWR CONT UN LOCK


(From U12: PLL IC) U30
CPU
Q2/12 TEST ON
F-VSWR DET
CR8 R52 PWR CONT DA
U4
U3(1/2)

R-VSWR DET
CR103 FROM
CR6
U3(2/2)
F VSWR
R VSWR AD

Fig. 8.1.1 TX POWER Detector Circuit

8-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.1 Self-test and Error Message

2. TX/RX PCB
This is to check the unlocked state of PLL circuit on TX/RX board (05P0774A, B).
Frequency to be checked is the frequency set up at the time of self-test. The
Un-lock/Lock signal is outputted from U12: PLL IC on TX/RX board. PLL circuit on
this board is used with both TX and RX. Tx Local frequency is Fo + 45 MHz, and RX
Local frequency is Fo + 51.2375 MHz.

TX/RX
05P0774 FL1: 45MHz
45 MHz U25
U5 U10

45 MHz
DDS

45 MHz
TA4001 TA4001 Rx 2nd Lo X2
(51.2MHz) 25.6MHz
Q20 Ref. OSC
Tx Local U11
PA DRIVE BPF(L/C) MIX (F0+45 MHz)
Tx out TC75HU04F
F0 VCO
U1 Q1,5 Q101 SW U8
Q13 Q14, CR11/12
2SK3874 PMBF J310 CR101 BPF(L/C) uPC2745TB
RA35H1516M 2SC3356 ISS271 2SC3356 2SC3356 CPU
1SV229 05P0773

uPC2745TB
U7
LPF
Q15
PMBF M310
RX Rx 1st Lo 51.2MHz
circuit (Fo+51.2375MHz) PLL PLL1 DATA(STB/DATA/CLK)
U12 U30
Rx 2nd Lo
Q21
PLL1 UN-LOCK CPU
(51.2MHz)
LMX2353TMX

Fig. 8.1.2 TX/RX PLL Block Diagram

3. CPU PCB
This is a loop-back test where test signal is transmitted from U17: CODEC on CPU
board (05P0773) and is detected by U10: CODEC. A signal transmitted from U17 is
sine wave of 2 kHz. If this frequency and a designated level are detected by U10, it will
be assessed “OK’’. U25: DDS check is carried out the same way and a test signal is
transmitted from DDS. U17 digitizes (A/D conversion) IF signal of 37.5 kHz
transmitted from CH70 RX board, TX/RX board and DUP RX board. U10 on the other
hand, digitizes (A/D, D/A conversion) mainly LINE input/output and AF input/output
from a Remote Handset. Refer to page 8-16 for DDS/CODEC test which takes the same
procedure.

CPU
05P0773
AOUT R CODEC DSP CPU
AOUT L U17
(HD64F2377)

(AK4528VF)
(ADSP2186)
R282
R283

U20

U30

VIDEO L CODEC
VIDEO R U10
(AK4543)

Fig. 8.1.3 CPU PCB Test

8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.1 Self-test and Error Message

4. CH70 RX PCB
Modulated signal 37.5 kHz of CH70 TEST signal is outputted from U17: CODEC on
CPU board. This test checks the test signal modulated by 1300 Hz and that modulated
by 2100 Hz. If the same signal transmitted from U17: CODEC on CPU board via R37
on CH70 RX board is detected, it will be assessed “OK’’. “NG’’ means there may be a
problem with CPU board (05P0773). Refer to page 8-12 for CH70 RX test which takes
the same procedure.

CPU
CH70 RX 05P0773
J3 J4
05P0775
CPU

R37 100k
#3 CH70 TEST #3 37.5MHz CODEC DSP
U17
#5 CH70 IF OUT #5

(HD64F2377)
37.5kHz (AK4528VF)

(ADSP2186)
MIX
R36
Q7

U20
CR4

U30
CODEC
U18 U10
(AK4543)

Fig. 8.1.4 CH70 RX PCB Test

5. DUP RX PCB
This is indicated when FM-8800D is in use. This is to check the unlocked state of PLL
circuit on DUP RX board (05P0777). Frequency to be checked it is 161.5 MHz at the
time of self-test. The Un-lock/Lock signal is outputted from U8: PLL IC on DUP RX
board. “NG” means there may be a problem with DUP RX board.
RX 1st Lo is Fo + 51.2375 MHz.

FL1 CR8/9
BPF(L/C) BPF(L/C) (51.2375MHz) MA2J728
DUP RX 37.5kHz U17
Q1 Q13 Q14 Q14 CODEC
2SK882 2SC3324
(51.2MHz)

CR10/11
Rx 2nd Lo

PMBFJ310
(Fo+51.2375MHz)

ISS271

X2
25.6MHz Ref. OSC
Q4
Rx 1st Lo

U3
VCO TC75HU04F
U5
Q5 Q6, CR3/4
BPF(L/C)
uPC2745TB

uPC2745TB CPU
2SC3356 2SC3356
1SV229
05P0773
uPC2745TB

LPF
Q11
PMBF M310
51.2MHz
PLL PLL2 DATA(STB/DATA/CLK) U30
DUP RX U8
PLL2 UN-LOCK CPU
05P0777 Q10
LMX2353TMX

Fig. 8.1.5 DUP RX PLL Block Diagram

8-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.1 Self-test and Error Message

8.1.2 Error messages


1. PLL1 Unlock
When unlocked state of PLL circuit on TX/RX board is detected, a pop-up window will
appear as an error. This checks the changing of channels and switching of TX/RX
function. See fig.8.1.2 for a detector circuit.

2. PLL2 Unlock
As for FM-8800D, when unlocked state of PLL circuit on DUP RX board (05P0777) is
detected, a pop-up widow will appear as an error. This checks the changing of channels
and switching of TX/RX function. Refer to fig.8.1.5 for a detector circuit.

3. GPS ERROR (EPFS ERROR: FM-8800 Ver. 03.01 and after, and Russian Ver.)
When a position data from GPS cannot be received for longer than a minute, a pop-up
window will appear as an error and alarm will go off. Alarm sound is of 2200 Hz (50
ms) and goes off three times every 2 seconds.
Refer to page 4-12 (1. POSITION OLDER) and page 4-18 (4.3.5 POSITION).

4. Printer PE
When Printer detects “Paper End”, a pop-up window will appear as an error and alarm
will go off. This error goes off when you try to print something out without a printer
connected. Refer to page 4-29 (4.3.7 PRINT OUT).

5. NO MMSI
If you press [LOG], [CALL/MSG] or [DISTRESS] key without MMSI being registered,
a pop-up window will appear as an error and alarm will go off.

6. System ERROR
When CPU detects malfunction with DSP, a pop-up window will appear as an error and
alarm will go off. U20: DSP and U30: CPU are in constant contact. If DSP does not
respond to a command from CPU, CPU will recognize DSP as malfunctioning and error
will go off.

7. RTC ERROR Input RTC


When communication between CPU and RTC stops, it is outputted by pop-up window.
In case this pop-up window is shown, failure of the RTC board can be considered.

8-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.1 Self-test and Error Message

Note:
Continuous alarm sounds
When DSP detects CPU malfunction, alarm will go off. U20: DSP and U30: CPU are in
constant contact. If CPU does not respond to a command from DSP, DSP will recognize
this as an error and alarm of 2200 Hz will continuously go off. Then, key input and
LCD indication will freeze up. Since there is no display function in DSP, alarm will go
off instead of showing a pop-up window an as error.

When detecting abnormally functioning antenna


During a continued transmission R-VSWR voltage and F-VSWR voltage are checked
three times after 5, 6 and 7 has passed from the start of the transmission. If RVSW
voltage is over its designated voltage, APC functions to reduce PA output.

8-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.2 DSC Communication Test

8.2 DSC Communication Test


This is a communication test between FM-8800S/Ds. Conditions under which this can
be done with the same MMSI are below only:
- CALL TYPE: Individual (SHIP CALL)
- CATEGORY: Routine
In this case, TX output of CH70 will automatically be reduced to Low Power.

NOTE:
FM-8500, etc can receive signals with the same MMSI. For example, No.2 VHF DSC
can receive a DISTRESS CALL or ALL SHIP CALL from No.1 VHF. This tends to
confuse a user. Therefore, when receiving the same registered MMSI, it will not carry
out RX processing of messages other than messages set up by above-mentioned
setup.
CH70 1W

1. ACK RQ CH70 1W
Ship Call
ROUTINE 2. ACK BQ
COM. CH6 ( ABLE)

TR ANT CH70 ANT TR ANT CH70 ANT

Handset 3. Voice Comunication Handset


ON HOOK No.1 VHF (CH6) No.2 VHF ON HOOK

AUTO ACK: ON, Able

Fig. 8.2.1 DSC Communication Test

Procedure
1. Carry out a DSC test from No.1 VHF to No2. VHF.
Press CALL key on No.1 VHF to create DSC message.
- CALL TYPE: SHIP CALL
- SHIP ID: No.2 VHF MMSI (Input Own ship)
- CATEGORY: ROUTINE
- TCmd 1: SIMPLEX TP
- TCmd 2: NO INFO
- CH: CH6
2. As for a setup procedure for No.2 VHF, Select [MENU] -> AUTO ACK -> and set
COMPLY STATUS setup to “ABLE”. In addition, set Handset/Remote Handsets to
“ON HOOK”, and to any channel.
3. Press CALL key on No.1 VHF for longer than three seconds. Then, “CALL IN
PROGRESS ON CH70” will appear and after transmitting from CH70 “WAITING
FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT” will appear. Then, wait for the ACK BQ from No.2
VHF.

8-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.2 DSC Communication Test

4. When receiving ACK BQ from No.2 VHF “ABLE ACKNOWLEDGE CALL


RECEIVED” will appear and alarm will go off. If you press [CANCEL] key, a
display will switch to VHF display and CH6 will be automatically set up.
5. With No.2 VHF, when receiving a call-up from No.1 VHF, ACK BQ will
immediately transmitted and alarm LED will blink and alarm will go off for 5
seconds. “ABLE ACKNOWLEDGE CALL IN PROGRESS” will appear on the
display.
6. Press [CANCEL] key, alarm will stop and transmitted message will appear.
7. Press [CANCEL] key a display will switch to VHF display and CH6 will
automatically be set up.

8. You carry out voice communication by CH6 between No.1 VHF and No.2 VHF.

9. The same procedure is taken to carry out a DSC test from No.2 VHF to No.1 VHF.

8-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP


Call up the option menu with reference to page 4-1. Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM ->
[ENT] -> and input the password. This section explains what T/A, TEST, and REST
DSP are.

8.3.1 T/A
You can carry out DSC RX TEST by selecting this item and pressing [ENT] key. This
checks the reception sensitivity on CH70 RX board and monitors DSC signals from
other ships.

DSC RX TEST
OUTPUT RX DSC DATA
TO NMEA PORT
EXT : ENT

IF signal: 37.5 kHz from CH70 RX board is inputted into U17: CODEC and is
converted into audio frequency of 1700 Hz ± 400 Hz. Then, it is outputted into the
Handset ear-speaker and SP of the Transceiver unit. A converted frequency just
mentioned is digitized and is outputted into TXD LINE (#1-#2) on IEC61162/REMOTE
port on RS-422 level. This signal is not converted into DSC characters but is used as a
DSC RX raw data for type approval.

8.3.2 TEST menu


1. CPU
1.1 LOOP TEST
1.1.1 FSK LOOP
Not used.
1.1.2 REMOTE LOOP
Not used.
1.1.3 NMEA LOOP
Not used.

8-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

1.2 MEMORY TEST *** MEMORY TEST ***


There is no need to select RAM, ROM and EEPROM ALL
RAM OK
separately to carry out a memory test. Just open a window ROM OK
shown on the right and the test results show in it. EEPROM OK

- RAM : is a test for U31 on CPU board and checks


Read/Write. RAM is used for CPU working
area.
- ROM : is a test for ROM for built-in U30 on CPU board and checks the
checksum. Main program is stored in ROM.
- EEPROM : is a test for U29 on CPU board that checks the checksum.
System setup value and communication log are stored in EEPROM.

1.3 PRINTER
Enter this menu and connect a printer. If you press ENT key, “FM-8800 PRINTER
TEST” will be printed out.

NOTE:
Printer: individual test for PP-510
- Turn on the power whiling pressing LF key:
Printer's self-test will print out all of characters until you turn the power off.
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL ---------
- Turn on the power while pressing NLQ:
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS PRINT OUT will be carried out

Printer: individual test for μTP-80F


For test printing:
1. Turn on the printer while pressing and holding down FEED switch.
2. All characters are printed out and then five line pattern is printed.
The printer is on-line after test printing.
- In case of PE during the test printing, returns to the state of PE after
printing a line.
- To cancel the test printing, press SEL switch. It stops printing and
changes to ON LINE in a few moments.

8-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

1.4 PROG. VER.


Displays the program version of connecting unit.

PROGRAM VERSION

FM-8800 : 0550215-02
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Remote Handset version number is indicated from a
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 low ID number in order. (See page.4-4 for details.)
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 - Version number of the unconnected unit is not
HS-8800 : 0550216-01 indicated.
IF-8820 : 0550217-01

Press [SHIFT] key once and [1] key 5 times. The detailed program version is
shown.

PROGRAM VERSION
PROGRAM VERSION
FM-8800 : 0550215-02-0x FM-8800 : 0550220-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x The detailed Ver. is the last 2 digits.
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
HS-8800 : 0550216-01-0x HS-8800 : 0550221-01-0x
IF-8820 : 0550217-01-0x 2006-01-25 20:11
Compiled time of the FM-8800
ITNL Ver. Russian Ver. program is displayed.

2. PANEL
2.1 LCD TEST
Press this item and press [ENT] key to carry out LCD contrast test. You can adjust the
contrast level from 0-15 by turning a Channel Knob.

LCD Cont. = 15 0123456789 : ;< >?


ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ \
’abcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxy012345
16 step 0123456789 :;<=>? ABCDE
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [
] ’abcdefghijklmnopq
rstuvwxy0123456789:;<=
> ? ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS
TUVWXYZ [ ] ’abcdefghi
jklmnopqrstuvwxy012345

[CHANNEL] knob or [ ] ADJ.


0123456789 : ;< >?
LCD Cont. = 06
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
[ENT] [ENT] PQRSTUVWXYZ \
’abcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxy012345
LCD TEST [ENT] 0123456789 :;<=>? ABCDE
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [
] ’abcdefghijklmnopq
rstuvwxy0123456789:;<=
> ? ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS
TUVWXYZ [ ] ’abcdefghi
jklmnopqrstuvwxy012345

[CHANNEL] knob or [ ] ADJ.


LCD Cont. = 00 0123456789 : ;< >?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ \
’abcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxy012345
0123456789 :;<=>? ABCDE
FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [
] ’abcdefghijklmnopq
rstuvwxy0123456789:;<=
> ? ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS
TUVWXYZ [ ] ’abcdefghi
jklmnopqrstuvwxy012345

8-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

2.2 BACK LIGHT


Select this item and press [ENT] key to carry out LCD back light test. Back light
changes can be adjusted from 1-4 every time you press [ENT] key.

*** PANEL TEST *** *** PANEL TEST *** *** PANEL TEST *** *** PANEL TEST ***

LCD TEST
[ENT] LCD TEST
[ENT] LCD TEST
[ENT] LCD TEST

BACK LIGHT 1 BACK LIGHT 1


UI TEST
BACK LIGHT 2
UI TEST
BACK LIGHT 3
UI TEST
BACK LIGHT 4
UI TEST

[ENT]

2.3 UI TEST
* USER I/F STATUS *
This is for User Interface test. (Test the front panel for key KEY : 2
CH : 03
switches, CHANNEL knob and so on.) VOL : 02333
SQ : 02343
PTT : OFF
HOOK : OFF HOOK

2.3.1 KEY : x
Indication changes depending on a key pressed. Indication will remain until another
key is pressed. Keys and their indications are below although [CANCEL] key is
excluded.
[1]->1, [2]->2, [3]->3, [4]->4, [5]->5, [6]->6, [7]->7, [8]->8, [9]->9, [0]->0,
[SHIFT]->SHIFT, [LOG]->LOG, [CH16]->CH16, [FILE]->FILE,
[MENU]->MENU, [ENT]->ENTER, [CALL]->CALL,
[DISTRESS]->DISTRESS
2.3.2 CH : xx
This is a test for a “CHANNEL” knob(encoder). Turning this knob will change the
value in every step turned in ranging from 00-99.
00 -> 01 -> 02 ---- -> 99 -> 00 ->01 -> 02 -> -----
2.3.3 VOL : xxxxx
This is a test for “VOLUME/POWER” volume. Turn this volume will change the
value in every 64 steps turned ranging from 00000-65472(65536). Range of outputted
voltage (0 - 3.3V) is digitized by 10-bit A/D converter with built-in CPU and will be
indicated. Technically, since voltage indicated when turning the volume to the
minimum is unsteady, minimum value is estimated to be 1000 or thereabouts.

8-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

2.3.4 SQ : xxxxx
This is a test for “SQUELCH” volume. Turning this volume will change the value in
every 64 steps turned ranging from 00000-65472(65536). Range of outputted voltage
(0-3.3V) is digitized by 10-bit A/D converter with built-in CPU and will be indicated.
When a position acquired on AUTO, 00000 will be indicated.
2.3.5 PTT : OFF/ON
This indicates the ON/OFF of PTT switch on the transceiver. When PTT is ON, ON
will be indicated and when it is OFF, OFF will be indicated.
2.3.6 HOOK : OFF HOOK/ON HOOK

3. CH70 RX
3.1 AGC
This is not in use.
This is only equipped in case checking AGC functions with “CHANNEL” knob or
[▲] [▼] key. This adjustment will change the voltage of J10-#25 and J8-
#12(AGC CONT) on CPU board.

AGC Test out


1.10V – 3.65V
<■■ > 1.65
EXT : EXT

3.2 LOOP
“LOOP P : 0 A : 9099”
This is a look-back test where IF frequency of 37.5 kHz of CH70 TEST signal is
transmitted from U17: CODEC on CPU board to CH70 board and is checked on
U17: CPU board via R37 on CH70 RX board. This test checks the test signal
modulated by tone of 1300 Hz and then the signal modulated by the tone of 2100
Hz.
- “P” is an assessment of included tone and if is normal “0” will be indicated
and “1” if abnormal. Tone will be assessed OK with over 98 %.
- “A” is the amplitude of received signals and 6000 and above will be assessed
normal.
This test is carried out and assessed just the same as CH70 RX test is.

8-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

4. TX/RX
4.1 PLL
This adjusts PLL circuit on TX/RX board. Frequency selected is set up as TX/RX
PLL frequency data.

** TX/RX PLL ** - RX 1st Lo frequency


155.00 MHz Fo + 51.2375 MHz
160.00 MHz - TX Lo frequency
165.00 MHz Fo + 45 MHz

4.2 AGC
This is not in use. This is only equipped in case adjusting of AGC voltage and
checking AGC functions with “CHANNEL” knob or [▲] [▼] key. Voltage of
J9-#25 on TX/RX board will be changed by this adjustment but since normally this
is function is not in use, 1.1V is always the setup voltage and indicated as below.

AGC Test out


1.10V – 3.65V
<■■ > 1.65
EXT : EXT

4.3 APC
This is not in use.

4.4 STATUS
This allows you to check the TX/ RX status as indicated below.

*** TX/RX STATUS ***


CH SIMP 16
RX IF LEVEL 2442
RX AF NOISE 18012
CH70 RX IF LEVEL 2442
CH70 RX AF NOISE 18012
PLL 1 UL LEVEL 0
PLL 2 UL LEVEL 0
EXIT : ENT

4.4.1 CH
Set up the channel to check with “CHANNEL” knob or [▲] [▼] key. The
channel mode is INTL.

8-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

4.4.2 RX IF LEVEL
This indicates IF signal level of 37.5 kHZ from TX/RX board which is its
amplitude. It changes according to the level of signal. When the signal increases,
RX IF LEVEL increases as well.

4.4.3 RX AF NOISE
This indicates out-off-band noise (over 37.5 kHz ± 12.5 kHz). It changes
according to the level of signal. When the signal increases, RX AF NOISE
decreases.

4.4.4 CH70 RX IF LEVEL


This indicates IF signal level of 37.5 kHz from CH70 RX board which is its
amplitude. It changes according to the level of signal. When the signal increases,
CH70 RX IF LEVEL increase as well.

4.4.5 CH70 RX AF NOISE


This indicates the out-of-band noise (over 37.5kHz ± 12.5 kHz). It changes
according to the level of signal. When the signal increases, CH70 RX AF
NOISE decreases.

4.4.6 PLL 1 UL LEVEL


This indicates the state (Q21 output) of PLL UN-LOCK on TX/RX board. PLL
frequency data inputted into TX/RX board is the channel set up in this display.
- The state of PLL LOCK: UL LEVEL indicates below 50 which is normally ''
“0”.
- The state of PLL UNLOCK: UL LEVEL indicates over 51 which is
normally “1023”.

4.4.7 PLL 2 UL LEVEL


This indicates the state (Q10 output) of PLL circuit on DUP RX board. PLL
frequency data inputted into DUP RX board is the channel set up in this display.
When FM-8800D is in SIMP mode, ''155'' is normally indicated.
- The state of PLL LOCK: UL LEVEL indicates below 50 which is normally
“0”.
- The state of PLL UNLOCK: UL-LEVEL indicates over 51 which is
normally “1023”.
CAUTION:
When FM-8800S is in use, ''155'' is indicated as PLL2 UL LEVEL.

8-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

NOTE:
Below chart shows the changing levels of FM-8800D RX IF LEVEL and AF NOISE.
Especially, IF LEVEL changes due to unsteadiness of RX gain. Also, antenna being
connected and not connected contributes to this change according to noise in the air as
well.

24000

23000

22000

21000

20000
CH18: IF Level
19000
CH16: IF Level

18000

17000

16000

15000 Reference only


14000

13000

12000

11000

10000 CH18: AF Noise

9000
Level

8000

7000

6000
CH16: AF Noise
5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
-130 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 dBm
-113dBm = 0dBu SSG Level

Fig. 8.3.1 FM-8800D, Change of RX IF LEVEL and AF NOISE

8-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

5. DUP RX
5.1 PLL
This adjusts the PLL circuit on DUP RX board. Frequency selected is set up as
DUP RX PLL frequency data.

** DUP RX PLL **
155.00 MHz RX: 1st Lo frequency
160.00 MHz Fo + 51.2375 MHz
165.00 MHz
5.2 AGC
This is not in use. This is only equipped in case checking AGC functions with
“CHANNEL” knob or [▲] [▼] key. The voltage of J10-#25 and J8-#12(AGC
CONT) on CPU board will be changed by this adjustment.

AGC Test out


1.10V – 3.65V
<■■ > 1.65
EXT : EXT

6. DDS/CODEC
This is a test for DDS: U25 and CODEC: U17 and U10 on CPU board. This is a
loop-back test where test signal is transmitted from U17 and is detected by U10. Output
signal transmitted from U17 is a sine wave of 2 kHz. The signal will be assessed “OK”
if U10 detects this frequency and a designated level. “P” indicates the percentage of
frequency of 2 kHz and “A” indicates the amplitude of RX signal. This test is carried
out and assessed just the same as CPU PCB self-test is which is explained in Self-test
section. DDS check is carried out just as mentioned above and test signal is transmitted
from DDS.

*** DDS/CODEC TEST ***


DDS P : 100 A : 19653
4528 L P : 100 A : 19960
4528 R P : 100 A : 19801

Judgment value to be OK

P A
DDS More than 20 More than 6000
4528 L More than 90 More than 6000
4528 R More than 90 More than 6000

8-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.3 T/A, TEST, RESET DSP

TX/RX IF OUT(37.5kHz)
CODEC CH70 RX OUT(37.5kHz)
U17: AK4528 AGC CONT(Not used)
CH70 TEST
ADUTL ADUTR

CHK CODEC
Key-in
H.S MIC
VIDEO L VIDEO R
R. H.S MIC
Wing MIC
CPU(H8S) DSP
Display U30: HD64F2377 U20: ADSP2186 CODEC SP
U10: AK4543 VDR
H.S SP
LINE OUT
AUX R

CHK DDS
CHK DDS
TX 45MHz
DDS
U25: AD9834BRU (Modulated)

Fig. 8.3.2 DDS/CODEC Test Block Diagram

7. RESET DSP
Reset U: 20 DSP on CPU board only. If you select this item and press [ENT] key, audio
output will pause for a moment which means DSP reset was successfully carried out.
This function checks to see what is having a problem, DSP or U30: CPU. If this test
restores modulation or demodulation problem, a problem with DSP will be the
possibility.

8-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.4 Memory Clear

8.4 Memory Clear


Execute MMSI CLEAR and ALL CLEAR
- Clear MMSI CLEAR: MMSI
- ALL CLEAR: Erase all registered/stored data. It returns to the default setting.

Procedure
1. Call up the option menu with reference to page 4-1.
Select [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] -> and input the password.
2. Select EEROM PROTECTD and input the password(same as step.1). Then, ON/OFF
pop-up window will appear.
3. Select OFF and press [ENT] key. Then, EEROM PROTECTED will switch to
EEROM.
4. Press ENT key and below display will appear.

NO CLEAR
MMSI CLEAR
ALL CLEAR

5. Select an item to select and press ENT key.

Carrying out of ALL CLEAR


When you carry out ALL CLEAR, “Int. EEPROM” pop-up window will appear. This
pop-up window disappears when ALL CLEAR is done which takes approximately 5
minutes and clears below Log and setups.
- Communication Log
- SETUP MENU (User Menu)
- SYSTEM SETUP MENU (Option Menu)

8-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.5 Compatibility of Boards

8.5 Compatibility of Boards


Table 8.5.1 Compatibility of FM-8800S/D Board

Board Name FM-8800S FM-8800D


CPU 05P0773 Common use Common use
TX/RX 05P0774 05P0774A 05P0774B
CH70 RX 05P0775 Common use Common use
PWR 05P0776 Common use Common use
PANEL 05P0772 Common use Common use
DUP RX 05P0777 Built-in: No Built-in: Yes
DUPLEXER Built-in: No Built-in: Yes

Change of TX/RX board (05P0774A/B)


The difference between 05P0774A and 05P0774B is whether there are connecting
DUPLEXER input/output ports, J1, J2, and J4 or not. FM-8800S and FM-8800D are
interchangeably used in case it is necessary since they share the same circuit. Same
circuits are common used for FM-8800S and FM-8800D when board is substituted.

1. In case of 05P0774-Ver. 03 and after

05P0774A: FM-8800S
Jumper between J1 and J2 on B side J5

05P0774B: FM-8800D
No jumper between J1 and J2
J1, J2 and J4: Installed

J4
J2

J1

For FM-8800S, Jumper


between J1 and J2.

Fig. 8.5.1 TX/RX Board: Sample of 05P0774B-Ver.3

8-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.5 Compatibility of Boards

2. In the case of before 05P0774-Ver. 02

05P0774A: FM-8800S
Short/Open between J1 and J2 I the ship J5
parts circled in fig. 8.5.2
When using 05P0774B in FM-8800S,
jumper between J1 and J2 on the B side.
05P0774B: FM-8800D
There are no chips, JP1, 2, and 3.
J1, J2, and J3 are installed.
When using 05P0774A in FM-8800D,
J4
remove chips JP1, 2, and 3 and install J1, J2 JP1, 2, 3
J2, and J3.

J1

Fig. 8.5.2 TX/RX B Board: Sample of 05P0774A-Ver.2

TX/RX DUP RX
05P0774A, B (05P0777)

DUPLEXER
PA
J1 : DUP OUT
TX FIL
SIMPLEX J2 : DUP IN 1
(JUMPER)
RX FIL R/T ANT
J4 : DUP IN 2

U2 J3 : ANT R/T ANT

Fig. 8.5.3 TX/RX Board: Antenna Circuit

8-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.6 Remote Handset Test

8.6 Remote Handset Test


This test is carried out separately with each Remote Handset. The transceiver and the
Remote Handsets can be used while one Remote Handset is being tested. Turn on the
power while pressing [3: TEST] key in order to enter this test mode. Upon entering,
alarm LED will blink every 2 seconds.

Procedure
1. Un-plug Remote Handset from RB-8800/8810.
2. Plug a Remote Handset into RB-8800, 8810 while pressing [3: TEST] key on it.
Make sure to keep pressing on the 3: TEST key until you enter a handset test mode
display as shown below.

Step-1)
Brilliance of LCD will automatically and continuously change every 2 seconds.
Repeating

H/W TEST LCD

Step-2) RS-485, KEY


Press [▼] to enter the next test.
RS-485 KEY

Note: RS-485 Test: Factory use


Note:
RS-485 checks the communication line between two Remote Handsets. This is a
communication test. After both Handsets enter RS-485 test, they continue to
transmit CAID command and its response: #ID HS8800S to each other as shown
below.

CAID
RS-485 RS-485
CAID #ID HS8800 CAID
#ID HS8800 #ID HS8800
CAID CAID
#ID HS8800 #ID HS8800
CAID CAID
#ID HS8800 CAID #ID HS8800
CAID CAID
#ID HS8800 #ID HS8800 #ID HS8800

No.xx HANDSET No.xx HANDSET

8-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.6 Remote Handset Test

After entering the test, characters corresponding to a key will be shown as below.

CM LO CA HK CM : [CALL/MSG] LO : [LOG] CA : [CANCEL] HK : [HOOK ON/OFF


FI AC EN FI : [FILE] AC : [ACK] EN : [ENT]
ME UP CH DS
LE DO RI
ME : [MENU] UP : [ ] CH : [CH16] DS : [DISTRESS]
1 2 3 LE : [SQ] DO : [ ] RI : [SQ auto]
4 5 6
7 8 9
1 : [1] 2 : [2] 3 : [3]
* 0 # 4 : [4] 5 : [5] 6 : [6]
7F
7 : [7] 8 : [8] 9 : [9]
* : [SHIFT] 0 : [0] # : [LOG]

Assigned code of KEY

Step-3) CONTRAST
To end KEY test, press [▼] twice. After entering contrast test, LCD brilliance will
automatically and continuously change in 4 different degrees.

CONTRAST CONTRAST CONTRAST CONTRAST


/0123456789 /0123456789 /0123456789 /0123456789
. : < = > ? ABCDEF . : < = > ? ABCDEF . : < = > ? ABCDEF . : < = > ? ABCDEF
GHIJKLMNOPQRS GHIJKLMNOPQRS GHIJKLMNOPQRS GHIJKLMNOPQRS
TUVWXYZ [ ] * ’ TUVWXYZ [ ] * ’ TUVWXYZ [ ] * ’ TUVWXYZ [ ] * ’
abcdefghijklm abcdefghijklm abcdefghijklm abcdefghijklm
nopqrstuvwxy nopqrstuvwxy nopqrstuvwxy nopqrstuvwxy
! " # $ &’()+, ! " # $ &’()+, ! " # $ &’()+, ! " # $ &’()+,
_./0123456789 _./0123456789 _./0123456789 _./0123456789

Step-4) DIMMER
To end CONTRAST test, press [ ▼ ]. LCD brilliance will automatically and
continuously change in 4 different degrees.

DIMMER

8-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.6 Remote Handset Test

Step-5) EAR SP, MONITOR SP, BUZZER and DTMF


To end DIMMER TEST, press [▼]. Every time you press [▼], the test will switch to
MONITOR SP, BUZZER or DTMF test. Each test will continue until another test
begins.
.

EAR SP MONITOR SP BUZZER DTMF


[ ] [ ] [ ]

EAR SP
Sound (LINE OUT) coming from EAR speaker of the Remote Handset will
automatically change. This is not easily perceptible to your ear.
MONITOR
Sound (LINE OUT) coming from monitor speaker of the Remote Handset will
automatically change in 4 different volume.
BUZZER
Buzzer sound will be outputted into the monitor speaker of the Remote Handset
and will change in 2 different volume.
DTMF
DTMF tone will be outputted into the monitor speaker of the Remote Handset and
will change in 2 different volume.

Step-6) EEPROM
To end DTMF test, press [▼].

EEPROM

FURUNO FM-880 The registered ID number for Remote Handset is indicated.


0
See page.4-4 for the registration method.
ID=1

8-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8.6 Remote Handset Test

Step-7) RB DIST LED


To end EEPROM test, press[▼]. Then, RB DIST LED test display will be shown as
below and pressing [▼] again will pop up RB SP test. Each test will continue until
another test begins.

RB DIST LED RB SP
[ ]

RB DIST LED
LED on RB-8800 [DISTRESS] button will continuously blink every second.

RB SP
Speaker output of RB-8800 will automatically and continuously ON/OFF. The
volume can be adjusted with “VOLUME” on RB-8800

Step-8) Going back to Step-1


To end RB SP test, press [▼] continuously. This will bring you back to Step-1, LCD
brilliance test.

Step-9) Ending the test


To end the handset test, turn off the power and unplug the Remote Handset.

8-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9.Chapter
Q &9. QA& A

Q1. How can we use VHF exclusively? See page. 4-2.


When your own ID (MMSI) is not registered FM-8800S/D becomes the only
operable VHF function. However, when you press [CALL], [DISTRESS] and
[LOG] key(DSC related function keys), “NO MMSI” a pop-up window appears.
- Even if the position data are not inputted, it is not a problem.
- Even if position data is not inputted, “GPS ERROR” pop-up window will
not appear.
In the FM-8800 program INTL VER. is 03.01 and after, and Russian Ver., the
display of “GPS ERROR” changes to “EPFS ERROR”.

Q2. What are the differences between FM-8800D and FM-8800S?


See page. 5-4, 5-8, 8-19.
FM-8800D has FULL-DUPLEX function and FM-8800S has SEMI-DUPLEX
function. FM-8800D with DUPLEX has DUPLEXER and DUP RX board installed
in it. The main program is commonly used by both FM-8800D and FM-8800S.
Switching a program detects whether DUP RX board is installed or not and is
carried out automatically.

Q3. Please tell me the priority of communication order. See page. 4-5.
Distress Alert of DSC has the highest priority. Priority order of a telephone is:
Transceiver unit > Remote-1 > Remote-2 > Remote-3 > Remote-4. Wing MIC is
independent of other units and cannot be used while any of the other units are
transmitting a signal. Also, when you are transmitting a signal from Wing MIC,
other units cannot transmit a signal.
In the DISTRESS mode after transmitting the distress alert, the priority of the
Transceiver unit and each Remote unit are equal.

Q4. Do the Transceiver unit and Remote Handset have to be installed in


designated location? See page. 4-5, Q37.
Since the transceiver unit has a higher priority than a Remote Handset, install the
Transceiver unit in ship’s W/H.

Q5. Receptible sentence. See page. 4-16.


IEC61162-1 (Corresponding to NMEA Ver.3):
GGA > RMC > GNS > GLL and ZDA.
Applicable talker name is:
GP > LC > DE > II > IN > EC > TR > LA > OM
When you are using GPS data, you cannot manually input position data.

9-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q6. Please tell me about the Alarm output. See page. 4-11.
When you receive Distress/Urgency DSC message, the alarm always goes off
but when you receive Routine and Safety DSC message, you can set up ON/OFF
by selecting [MENU] -> ALARM.
As for external alarm, it synchronously functions with alarm outputted from the
Transceiver unit and Remote stations. Distress/Urgency alarm will continue to
go off until you press [CANCEL] key. Safety and Routine alarm will
automatically stop after 2 minutes or until you press [CANCEL] key.
Note; The EXT ALM circuit on CPU board is changed to the normal close
from production in June 2006.

Q7. Can Carbon MIC be used in place Wing MIC? See page. 4-28.
Either Carbon MIC or Dynamic MIC can be used. However, setup with J5 on
CPU board will be necessary.
- Carbon MIC: J5 -> Jumper between #2 and #3
- Dynamic MIC: J5 -> Jumper #1 and #2

Q8. Can Remote Handset be used alone without Transceiver Handset on?
See page. 4-29.
Yes it can although setup that keeps HOOK signal on the Transceiver unit side
“ON HOOK” at all time is necessary. You will then have to make a jumper
connection between #1 and #2 on J15.

Q9. Does Remote Handset have to be wired in daisy chain?


See page. 4-26.
Communication between Remote station and Transceiver unit is carried out on
the basis of ID number set up for each Remote Handset. Either daisy chain
method or parallel wired connection from Junction Box etc, can be used. When
connecting Remote stations, terminate data line of the electrically farthest
Remote station.

Q10. Can VHF antenna be used together with CH70 WR antenna?


See page. 4-30.
It is operative. However, you cannot watch CH70 signal from continuously
working CH70 board during a transmission. Connect it with a coaxial cable
between J2 of CH70 RX board antenna inputting and J5 of TX/RX board. The
coaxial cable is Mini-pin assembly (1) L-420. (Supplied material: Code
000-151-748)

Q11. Is a Junction Box: IF-8810 necessary?


For example, if you can connect GPS data inputted to Transceiver unit to
[IEC-61162/REMOTE] port directly, IF-8810 is actually not necessary. However,
it becomes necessary if you want to connect it to Remote stations.

9-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q12. How to adjust LCD contrast? See page. 1-4, 4-1.


Press [SHIFT] key and adjust by a channel knob or by pressing [▼] and [▲]
key. It is adjustable in 16 different levels of contrasts and a set up value can be
stored even if the power is OFF/ON. As for the brightness of LCD, press SHIFT
key and adjust it with [2] key.

Q13. How to cancel menu’s protection? See page. 4-1.


See FURUNO Information: FQ5-2005-015 for the password. Make a jumper
connection between #2 and #15 pin of [PRINTER] port. Or, jumper connection
between #25 and #26 of IF-8810.
Then, press [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> [ENT] key and input the password. (The
same as FM-8500’s password: XXXXXX) After the protection is cancelled, you
can go into all system menus to register/change MMSI, etc.

Q14. Please tell me what to check after installing. See Check List.
Setting to check after installation:
- The least you have to check is to set up MMSI by
[MENU] -> SYSTEM -> MMSI
- When more than one Remote stations are installed, make sure of their ID
number.
Turn on the power while pressing [MENU] key on the Remote Handset
and then, enter ID number.
- Make sure that position data are inputted.
- Carry out DSC and voice communication test between No.1 VHF and
No.2 VHF. When you have only one VHF installed, make sure of VHF
TX output and carry out a test by going to [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> T/A
to check the monitor sound outputted from CH70 RX board.

Q15. How do I adjust the frequency? See page. 6-3.


There is no part that adjusts it. Since Transceiver’s reference OSC uses TCXO,
the stability of frequency is excellently maintained. If the frequency tolerance is
more/less than ± 10 ppm (Approximately +1.5 kHz) as a rule, change CPU
board which has TCXO.

Q16. How do I measure DSC tone frequency? See page. 6-5.


In the FM-8800 program, INTL Ver.-03.01 and after, also Russian Ver., tone
selected from a speaker is outputted when performing the TONE TEST.
As for the FM-8800 program (Ver.02.03 and before);
There is no part that measures it. One of VHF monitors it.
- Setup on TX side
Set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> TONE TEST -> MARK or select
SPACE and PTT ON.
- Setup on RX (monitor) side
Set up by [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> T/A and measure tone frequency
by SP output.

9-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q17. Will the Program-Ver. indication remain the same even after updating
the program? See page. 7-10.
An indication shown by [MENU] -> PROGRAM VERSION will not change.
When confirming a detailed program version, select [MENU] -> SYSTEM ->
TEST -> CPU -> PRG. VER and then, press [1] key 5 times while pressing
[SHIFT] key. The detailed version will appear.

Q18. Is the Main program commonly used for FM-8800D and FM-8800S?
See page. 5-8.
Yes it is. A change of the program is automatically carried out by detecting
whether DUP RX board is installed or not.

Q19. I cannot update the program/How do I update the program? (Case 1)


See page. 7-2.
If there is no problem with the PC setup or with the connection, there probably is
a problem with RS-232C/RS-422 level converter. The speed in which the
program is downloaded from PC to the Transceiver unit is 57.6 kbps.
Is the level converter speed even faster?

Q20. I cannot update the program/How do I update the program? (Case 2)


See page. 7-6.
Am I supposed to select COM-1 for serial port?
If you want to use a serial port other than COM-1 then, you would have to
update the batch file of the program that you want to update or select COM-1 for
serial port on PC.

Q21. Remote Handset is not working properly. See page. 4-4, 5-23.
Each Remote Handset has to be assigned different ID number.
Have you set up different ID number? The factory setting is “1”.
Communication between Remote Handsets and Transceiver unit is made
possible on the basis of this ID number. A communication between Remote
Handsets with the same ID cannot be carried out.

Q22. I cannot receive DSC signals although telephone is working just fine.
See page. 8-8.
There may be a problem with a CH70 WR antenna or CH70 RX board.
1) Carry out a self-test. If the result is OK, electrical connection between
CH70 Rx board and CPU board is OK then CPU board is fine.
2) Try exchanging CH70 WR antenna with RT antenna and then check it
again.
3) Carry out [MENU] -> SYSTEM TEST -> T/A.
This test receives RX signal on CH70 RX board, modulates it on CPU
board, and then outputs it to Handset ear-speaker and the speaker of the
Transceiver unit as AFSK signal. If you cannot hear a DSC signal or noise,
the, there may be a problem with CH70 RX board.

9-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q23. What are the differences between 05P0774A and B on TX/RX PCB?
See page. 8-19.
The 05P0774A is used for FM-8800S and the 05P0774B is used for FM-8800D.
The only difference is whether the input/output connector circuit is connected
to DUPLEXER or not.

Q24. What is a DISTRESS MODE? See page. 1-6.


It just means that you have transmitted DISTRESS ALERT which removes a
telephone priority normally set up in order of the Transceiver unit -> Remote 1
-> Remote 2 -> Remote3 -> Remote 4. In this case, communication can only be
carried out from wherever PTT is pressed.

Q25. How can I clear memory? See page. 8-18.


You can carry that out by selecting [MENU] -> SYSTEM -> EEROM -> ALL.
Then, a pop-up window with “Init EEPROM” in it will appear and when it
disappears, it means MEMORY CLEAR was done but it takes about 5 minutes.
Keep in mind this will clear all of LOG and setups as well.

Q26. When I make All Ship Call from No.1 VHF, I could not receive signals
through No.2 VHF. Is the equipment broken? See page. 8-6.
It is not broken. They are made in a way that a call-up with the same MMSI dose
not accept. For example, if you transmitted ALL SHIP CALL from No.1 VHF to
No.2 VHF and incoming alarm and messages were outputted with the same
MMSI, that would be very confusing as to who is outputting what. In order to
avoid this situation, except when the Call Type is Individual and Category is
Routine, reception of signals with MMSI will not be accepted.

Q27. Communication does not seem to be working correctly when Remote


Handsets are connected. See page. 4-4, 5-23.
Have you set up different ID number for each Remote Handset? When more
than one Remote Handset with the same ID number are connected, it causes a
collision of data between the Transceiver unit and a Remote Handset. The ID
number of factory setting is “1”. In order to set up ID number, unplug Remote
Handset from RB-8800/8810 and then plug it back in while pressing [MENU]
key that is on it.

Q28. When I turn on the power, alarm keeps going off and nothing comes
up on the display. See page. 8-5.
That means CPU on CPU board is fault. You would have to replace CPU board
then. This is a problem seen when CPU does not respond to a command from
DSP.

9-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q29. Would disconnecting or short-circuiting antenna break Transceiver


unit? See page. 5-14.
Transceiver unit: PA, No problem.
When R-VSWR was detected to be over designated voltage, FM-8800S/D
automatically reduces PA output to keep it within its designated output.

Q30. “DSC-5” indication appears after a self-test with DMC-5. Is this okay?
DMC-5 displays DSC-5 when FM-8800 does not respond to CAID command
from DMC during a self-test.
Note; In Russian Ver, DMC-5 is not connectable.

Q31. Please tell me about where to install the antennas. See Q37.
In order to avoid interference of signals, it would be advisable to install No.1
VHF antenna and No.1 CH70 WR antenna in Radar mast’s yard, No.2 VHF
antenna and No.2 CH70 WR antenna in Compass deck.

Q32. What is the min. horizontal length between VHF Antennas? See Q37.
If possible, install then 10 m apart from each other but make sure keep they are
at least 5 m apart.

Q33. Please tell me about where to install the VHF.


Install No.1 VHF on the starboard side and run a wire for both Wing MIC from
there. Also, it would be advisable to install a Remote Handset where you operate
a Radar.

Q34. Does a VHF Rack-consol have a type?


Yes it does. A VHF Rack consol type is called RC-8800 that consists of the main
unit, printer (PP-8800), IF-8800, a handset and a hanger. Its three dimensional
size is 330 (width) x 500 ( length) x 190 ( depth ).

Q35. Please tell me about RS-485.


RS-485 is one of the serial communication specifications standardized by EIA
(Electronic Industries Association) and is of a higher standard than that of
RS-422. RS-485 has a higher compatibility as well. While RS-232C is only
allowed for one-on-one standardized connection and RS-422 is for
one-on-several (multi-drop connection) connection, RS-485 is compatible with a
bus-shaped multi-point connection and allows for the maximum of 32
connections. The rest of RS-485 specifications are based upon RS-422 and the
maximum cable length is 1.2 km and the maximum communication speed is 10
Mbps.

9-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q36. Please tell me about communication range?


Below graph is to help you figure out the electric field intensity within a range
of h1(10 m) and h2(the height of the other ship) when the signal is transmitted
with 144 MHz and 10 W.
How to figure that out is:
For example, let’s say that if the height of the antenna on your own ship is 10 m
high and other’s within 10~30 m, the point where the X-axis of the line with the
minimum electric field intensity of +6 dB and the height of the other ship’s
antenna, let’s say 20 m high for example, intersects is the RX distance in
question here. However, make sure to shift the curve upward by 3 dB.
Therefore, we can confirm from below graph that 50~70 km (26~38 NM) is the
VHF’s communication range and signals outside of it will be considered to be
abnormally propagated signals.

+6 dB

e.g. Other ship’s


antenna is 20 m.

Communication distance to find

9-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

Q37. An inspector cautioned me about contents of COMSAR/Cir.32


regarding installation of equipment. What is it about?
COMSAR/Circ.32 is about GMDSS requirements for radio installation issued
by IMO on 08/16/2004. The heading is ''Harmonization of GMDSS
requirements for radio installation on SOLAS ship.

http://www.imo.org/includes/blastDataOnly.asp/data_id%3D10750/32.pdf

A section concerning VHF installation is,

4 GMDSS RADIO EQUIPMENT


4.1 Location of VHF transceivers and VHF DSC controllers
.1 VHF with DSC forming part of the mandatory VHF communication equipment for
safety of navigation should be located in the conning position. This equipment may
be connected to several remote control units, i.e. on the wings of the navigation
bridge, provided that the navigating bridge has priority. If such combined equipment
is chosen, it should be possible to transmit DSC distress alert from the conning
position.
.2 If the ship is equipped with extra VHF transceiver (without DSC) with channels
required for navigational safety, located in the conning position, another central
location of the mandatory DSC VHF equipment on the navigation bridge (in
navigating position) can be accepted.
(SOLAS 1974, as amended, regulations IV/4.1.5, 4.1.9 and 6.3.)
Note: - With regard to the location of equipment and distress alerts, the same
requirements also apply to the duplicated DSC VHF equipment for ships in
sea areas A3 and A4. The duplicated VHF transceiver can, however, be
located in the .navigating position. instead of in the conning position.
(IMO resolution A.702(17), Annex, item 2.1.)
In order to conduct power measurements, easy access to the antenna output of each
equipment should be provided.
(SOLAS 1974, as amended, regulation IV/15.2 and IMO resolution A.948(23))

4.2 Continuous watch on DSC VHF channel 70


Continuous watch on DSC VHF channel 70 can be met by:
.1 a separate VHF channel 70 watch receiver. It should not be muted or interrupted
when using other radio equipment, or
.2 a dedicated watch receiver combined with the VHF transceiver. It should be installed
so as to maintain watch even when the VHF equipment is used for telephony, or
.3 VHF with DSC permanently locked on channel 70 for reception and transmission of
DSC calls only. To deal with other correspondence on other channels, an additional
VHF transceiver should be installed, which may be without the DSC function.
(IMO resolutions A.694(17) and A.803(19), as amended, and COM/Circ.105)

9-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 9. Q & A

5 ANTENNA INSTALLATION
5.1 General
Special attention should be paid to the location and installation of the different antennas
on a ship in order to ensure effective and efficient communication. Incorrect installed
antennas will degrade the performance of the radio equipment and will reduce the range
of radio communications.

5.2 Location of VHF antennas


.1 VHF antennas should be placed in a position which is as elevated and free as possible,
with at least 2 m horizontal separation from constructions made by
conductive materials.
.2 VHF antennas should have a vertical polarization.
.3 Ideally there should not be more than one antenna on the same level.
.4 The location of mandatory VHF antennas should be given priority compared with
mobile telephone antennas. If they are located on the same level, the distance
between them should be at least 5 m.
.5 It is recommended to use double screened cable with a maximum loss of 3 dB.
.6 All outdoor installed connectors on the coaxial cables should be watertight by design
in order to give protection against water penetration into the antenna cable.
.7 AIS VHF antenna should be installed safely away from interfering high-power
energy sources like radar and other transmitting radio antennas, preferably at least
3 m away from and out of the transmitting beam.
.8 The AIS VHF antenna should be mounted directly above or below the ship's primary
VHF radiotelephone antenna, with no horizontal separation and with minimum
2 m vertical separation. If it is located on the same level as other antennas, the
distance apart should be at least 5 m.

5.7 Installation of coaxial cables


Coaxial cables should be installed in separate ducting and at least 10 cm away from
power supply cables. Incorrect installation of cables my change their characteristic
impedance resulting in power reflections, which will attenuate the RF signal and reduce
the efficiency of the radio equipment. In VHF antennas the reflected power should not
be greater than 10% of the measured output power.
The following guidelines should be applied when bending coaxial cables:
.1 Cables should be crossed at right angles.
.2 Where there is one bend in a permanent fixture the bending radius should be 5 times
the cables. outside diameter.
.3 Where there are several bends, the bending radius should be 10 times the outside
diameter of the cable.
.4 When using flexible cable the bending radius should be 20 times the outside
diameter of the cable.

9-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix 1) Specifications
AP1) Specifications

1. General
(1) Channel numbers

NTL: 57
USA: 48
Weather: 10
Canada: 55 (57)*
INLND-WA: 55 (57)*
Private: 20
Memory: 50
*CH75/76 can be included for some countries
(2) Frequency stability Within ±1.5kHz
(3) Communication system FM-8800D: Simplex/Full-duplex
FM-8800S: Simplex/Semi-duplex
(4) Class of Emission 16K0G3E (Voice)
16K0G2B (DSC)
(5) Antenna impedance 50 ohms

2. Transmitter
(1) Frequency range
Simplex 155.000 to 158.000 MHz
FM-8800D
Duplex 155.000 to 158.000 MHz
Simplex 155.000 to 161.475 MHz
FM-8800S
Semi-duplex 155.000 to 161.475 MHz

(2) Output power 25 W max., 1 W at power reduction


(3) Frequency deviation 5 kHz or less

AP1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP1) Specifications

3. Receiver
(1) Frequency range Simplex 155.000 to 158.000 MHz
FM-8800D
Duplex 160.625 to 162.600 MHz
Simplex 155.000 to 159.600 MHz
FM-8800S
Semi-duplex 161.475 to 164.200 MHz

(2) Receiving system Double superheterodyne


(3) Intermediate frequency 1st: 51.2375 MHz, 2nd: 37.5 kHz
(4) Sensitivity +6 dB µ V (20 dB SINAD)
(5) Adjacent channel selectivity 70 dB or more
(6) Spurious response 70 dB or more
(7) AF output Built-in speaker 3 W (4 ohms)
Handset earphone: 2 mW (150 ohms)

4. DSC
(1) Protocol ITU-R Rec. M541-8, M493-10 (class A)
INTL Ver.: 0550215-02.xx, 03.xx
ITU-R Rec. M541-9, M493-11(class A)
Russian Ver.: 0550220-01.xx
(2) Baud rate 1200 baud ± 30 ppm max.
(3) Modulation AFSK
(4) Frequency shift 1700 ± 400 Hz
Mark: 1300 Hz ± 10 Hz, Space 2100 Hz ± 10 Hz

5. CH70 WATCH Receiver


(1) Receiving frequency 156.525 MHz
(2) Sensitivity Symbol error rate Less than 1% (at 0 dB µ V)
(3) Conducted spurious emission Less than 2 nW

AP1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP1) Specifications

6. Power Supply
(1) Transceiver unit DC24 V (-10 % to +30 %)
(2) Power voltage
At the time of standby 0.5 A
At the time of reception 1.6 A(4 W audio output)
2 A(1 W output)
FM-8800D At the time of transmission
6 A(25 W output)
3.6 A(1 W output)
At the time of DUP transmission
7.6 A(25 W output)
At the time of standby 0.5 A
At the time of reception 1.6 A(4 W audio output)
FM-8800S
1.6 A(1 W output)
At the time of transmission
4.7 A(25 W output)

7. Digital Interface
(1) Signal format IEC61162-1 (NMEA0183 Ver.3)
(2) Input sentences & Priority Position: GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
Date: ZDA>RMC
Time: ZDA>GGA>RMC>GNS>GLL
(3) Output sentences TLL
(4) Talker GP>LC>DE>II>IN>EC >TR>LA>OM

8. Environmental Conditions
(1) Ambient temperature -15 °C to 55 °C (IEC60945)
(2) Relative humidity Less than 93 % (+40 °C)
(3) Waterproofing (IEC60529)
Transceiver unit: IPX4 (Chassis)
IPX0 (Panel)
Handset/Hangar: IPX4
Remote station/Handset
RB-8800: IPX0
HS-8800: IPX2
Junction box: IPX0
DMC I/F: IPX0

AP1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP1) Specifications

(4) Viblation-registant (IEC60945 4 edition)


2 Hz – 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz: Vibration amplitude ± 1 mm ± 10 %
(Maximum acceleration 7 m/s2 with13.2 Hz )
3.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Maximum acceleration 7 m/s2 Fixed

9. Coating Color
Transceiver unit Panel unit: N3-3 (Charcoal gray)
Except for the Panel unit: N3-3 (Charcoal gray)

AP1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix 2) ChannelWaterways
AP2.1 International/USA/Canadian/Inland List

AP2.1 International/USA/Canadian/Inland Waterways


1/3
International USA Canadian Inland
Channel Channels Channels Channels Waterways
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
60 156.025 160.625 - - 156.025 160.625 156.025 160.625
1 156.050 160.650 156.050 156.050 160.650 156.050 160.650
(Low Power)
61 156.075 160.675 - - 156.075 156.075 160.675
2 156.100 160.700 - - 156.100 160.700 156.100 160.700
62 156.125 160.725 - - 156.125 156.125 160.725
3 156.150 160.750 - - 156.150 160.750 156.150 160.750
63 156.175 160.775 156.175 - - 156.175 160.775
4 156.200 160.800 - - 156.200 156.200 160.800
64 156.225 160.825 - - 156.225 156.225 160.825
5 156.250 160.850 156.250 156.250 156.250 160.850
156.275
65 156.275 160.875 156.275 156.275 160.875
(Low Power)
156.300
6 156.300 156.300 156.300
(Low Power)
66 156.325 160.925 156.325 156.325 156.325 160.925
7 156.350 160.950 156.350 156.350 156.350 160.950
156.375
67 156.375 156.375 156.375
(Low Power)
156.400
8 156.400 156.400 156.400
(Low Power)
68 156.425 156.425 156.425 156.425
9 156.450 156.450 156.450 156.450
69 156.475 156.475 156.475 156.475
156.500
10 156.500 156.500 156.500
(Low Power)
156.525
70
(DSC)
156.550
11 156.550 156.550 156.550
(Low Power)
156.575
71 156.575 156.575 156.575
(Low Power)
156.600
12 156.600 156.600 156.600
(Low Power)
156.625
72 156.625 156.625 156.625
(Low Power)

AP2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.1 International/USA/Canadian/Inland Waterways

2/3
International USA Canadian Inland
Channel Channels Channels Channels Waterways
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
156.650 156.650
13 156.650 156.650
(Low Power) (Low Power)
73 156.675 156.675 156.675 156.675
156.700
14 156.700 156.700 156.700
(Low Power)
156.725
74 156.725 156.725 156.725
(Low Power)
156.750 156.750 156.750
15 - 156.750
(Low Power) (Low Power) (Low Power)
156.775
75 - - - - - -
(Low Power)
156.800
16
(Distress/Safety and Calling)
156.825
76 - - - - - -
(Low Power)
156.850 156.850 156.850 156.850
17
(Low Power) (Low Power) (Low Power) (Low Power)
156.875 156.875 156.875
77 156.875
(Low Power) (Low Power) (Low Power)
18 156.900 161.500 156.900 156.900 156.900 161.500
78 156.925 161.525 156.925 156.925 156.925 161.525
19 156.950 161.550 156.950 156.950 156.950 161.550
79 156.975 161.575 156.975 156.975 156.975 161.575
20 157.000 161.600 157.000 157.000 161.600 157.000 161.600
(Low Power)
80 157.025 161.625 157.025 157.025 157.025 161.625
21 157.050 161.650 157.050 157.050 157.050 161.650
81 157.075 161.675 157.075 157.075 157.075 161.675
22 157.100 161.700 157.100 157.100 157.100 161.700
82 157.125 161.725 157.125 157.125 157.125 161.725
23 157.150 161.750 157.150 157.150 161.750 157.150 161.750
83 157.175 161.775 157.175 157.175 157.175 161.775
24 157.200 161.800 157.200 161.800 157.200 161.800 157.200 161.800
84 157.225 161.825 157.225 161.825 157.225 161.825 157.225 161.825
25 157.250 161.850 157.250 161.850 157.250 161.850 157.250 161.850
85 157.275 161.875 157.275 161.875 157.275 161.875 157.275 161.875
26 157.300 161.900 157.300 161.900 157.300 161.900 157.300 161.900

AP2-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.2 US Weather Channel

3/3
Channel International USA Canadian Inland
Channels Channels Channels Waterways
Tx Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx Rx Tx
86 157.325 161.925 157.325 161.925 157.325 161.925 157.325 161.925
27 157.350 161.950 157.350 161.950 157.350 161.950 157.350 161.950
87 157.375 157.375 157.375 157.375
28 157.400 162.000 157.400 162.000 157.400 162.000 157.400 162.000
88 157.425 157.425 157.425 157.425

AP2.2 US Weather Channel

WX Rx (MHz) WX Rx (MHz)
01 162.550 06 162.500
02 162.400 07 162.525
03 162.475 08 161.650
04 162.425 09 161.775
05 162.450 10 163.275

AP2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

AP2.3 Private Channel


Note: Bold and Italic are for FM-8800D Duplex Tx Frequency 1/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
180 155.000 155.000 159.600
181 155.025 155.025 159.625
182 155.050 155.050 159.650
183 155.075 155.075 159.675
184 155.100 155.100 159.700
185 155.125 155.125 159.725
186 155.150 155.150 159.750
187 155.175 155.175 159.775
188 155.200 155.200 159.800
189 155.225 155.225 159.825
190 155.250 155.250 159.850
191 155.275 155.275 159.875
192 155.300 155.300 159.900
193 155.325 155.325 159.925
194 155.350 155.350 159.950
195 155.375 155.375 159.975
196 155.400 155.400 160.000 155.400 155.400
197 155.425 155.425 160.025 155.425 155.425
198 155.450 155.450 160.050 155.450 155.450
199 155.475 155.475 160.075 155.475 155.475
120(L1) 155.500 155.500 160.100 155.500 155.500
121(L2) 155.525 155.525 160.125 155.525 155.525
122 155.550 155.550 160.150 155.550 155.550
123 155.575 155.575 160.175 155.575 155.575
124 155.600 155.600 160.200 155.600 155.600
125(F1)(P1) 155.625 155.625 160.225 155.625 155.625
126(L3) 155.650 155.650 160.250 155.650 155.650
127 155.675 155.675 160.275 155.675 155.675

AP2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

2/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
128 155.700 155.700 160.300 155.700 155.700
129 155.725 155.725 160.325 155.725 155.725
130 155.750 155.750 160.350 155.750 155.750
131(F2)(P2) 155.775 155.775 160.375 155.775 155.775
132 155.800 155.800 160.400 155.800 155.800
133(F3)(P3) 155.825 155.825 160.425 155.825 155.825
134 155.850 155.850 160.450 155.850 155.850
135 155.875 155.875 160.475 155.875 155.875
136 155.900 155.900 160.500 155.900 155.900
137 155.925 155.925 160.525 155.925 155.925
138 155.950 155.950 160.550 155.950 155.950
139 155.975 155.975 160.575 155.975 155.975
0 156.000 156.000 160.600 156.000 156.000 160.600
60 156.025 156.025 160.625 156.025 156.025 160.625
1 156.050 156.050 160.650 156.050 156.050 160.650
61 156.075 156.075 160.675 156.075 156.075 160.675
2 156.100 156.100 160.700 156.100 156.100 160.700
62 156.125 156.125 160.725 156.125 156.125 160.725
3 156.150 156.150 160.750 156.150 156.150 160.750
63 156.175 156.175 160.775 156.175 156.175 160.775
4 156.200 156.200 160.800 156.200 156.200 160.800
64 156.225 156.225 160.825 156.225 156.225 160.825
5 156.250 156.250 160.850 156.250 156.250 160.850
65 156.275 156.275 160.875 156.275 156.275 160.875
6 156.300 156.300 160.900 156.300 156.300 160.900
66 156.325 156.325 160.925 156.325 156.325 160.925
7 156.350 156.350 160.950 156.350 156.350 160.950
67 156.375 156.375 160.975 156.375 156.375 160.975
8 156.400 156.400 161.000 156.400 156.400 161.000
68 156.425 156.425 161.025 156.425 156.425 161.025

AP2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

3/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
9 156.450 156.450 161.050 156.450 156.450 161.050
69 156.475 156.475 161.075 156.475 156.475 161.075
10 156.500 156.500 161.100 156.500 156.500 161.100
70 156.525 156.525 161.125 156.525 156.525 161.125
11 156.550 156.550 161.150 156.550 156.550 161.150
71 156.575 156.575 161.175 156.575 156.575 161.175
12 156.600 156.600 161.200 156.600 156.600 161.200
72 156.625 156.625 161.225 156.625 156.625 161.225
13 156.650 156.650 161.250 156.650 156.650 161.250
73 156.675 156.675 161.275 156.675 156.675 161.275
14 156.700 156.700 161.300 156.700 156.700 161.300
74 156.725 156.725 161.325 156.725 156.725 161.325
15 156.750 156.750 161.350 156.750 156.750 161.350
75 156.775 156.775 161.375 156.775 156.775 161.375
16 156.800 156.800 161.400 156.800 156.800 161.400
76 156.825 156.825 161.425 156.825 156.825 161.425
17 156.850 156.850 161.450 156.850 156.850 161.450
77 156.875 156.875 161.475 156.875 156.875 161.475
18 156.900 156.900 161.500 156.900 156.900 161.500
78 156.925 156.925 161.525 156.925 156.925 161.525
19 156.950 156.950 161.550 156.950 156.950 161.550
79 156.975 156.975 161.575 156.975 156.975 161.575
20 157.000 157.000 161.600 157.000 157.000 161.600
80 157.025 157.025 161.625 157.025 157.025 161.625
21 157.050 157.050 161.650 157.050 157.050 161.650
81 157.075 157.075 161.675 157.075 157.075 161.675
22 157.100 157.100 161.700 157.100 157.100 161.700
82 157.125 157.125 161.725 157.125 157.125 161.725
23 157.150 157.150 161.750 157.150 157.150 161.750
83 157.175 157.175 161.775 157.175 157.175 161.775

AP2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

4/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
24 157.200 157.200 161.800 157.200 157.200 161.800
84 157.225 157.225 161.825 157.225 157.225 161.825
25 157.250 157.250 161.850 157.250 157.250 161.850
85 157.275 157.275 161.875 157.275 157.275 161.875
26 157.300 157.300 161.900 157.300 157.300 161.900
86 157.325 157.325 161.925 157.325 157.325 161.925
27 157.350 157.350 161.950 157.350 157.350 161.950
87 157.375 157.375 161.975 157.375 157.375 161.975
28 157.400 157.400 162.000 157.400 157.400 162.000
88 157.425 157.425 162.025 157.425 157.425 162.025
29 157.450 157.450 162.050 157.450 157.450 162.050
89 157.475 157.475 162.075 157.475 157.475 162.075
30 157.500 157.500 162.100 157.500 157.500 162.100
90 157.525 157.525 162.125 157.525 157.525
31 157.550 157.550 162.150 157.550 157.550
91 157.575 157.575 162.175 157.575 157.575
32 157.600 157.600 162.200 157.600 157.600
92 157.625 157.625 162.225 157.625 157.625
33 157.650 157.650 162.250 157.650 157.650
93 157.675 157.675 162.275 157.675 157.675
34 157.700 157.700 162.300 157.700 157.700
94 157.725 157.725 162.325 157.725 157.725
35 157.750 157.750 162.350 157.750 157.750
95 157.775 157.775 162.375 157.775 157.775
36 157.800 157.800 162.400 157.800 157.800
96 157.825 157.825 162.425 157.825 157.825
37 157.850 157.850 162.450 157.850 157.850
97 157.875 157.875 162.475 157.875 157.875
38 157.900 157.900 162.500 157.900 157.900
98 157.925 157.925 162.525 157.925 157.925

AP2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

5/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
39 157.950 157.950 162.550 157.950 157.950
99 157.975 157.975 162.575 157.975 157.975
40 158.000 158.000 162.600 158.000 158.000
100 158.025 158.025 162.625 158.025
41 158.050 158.050 162.650 158.050
101 158.075 158.075 162.675 158.075
42 158.100 158.100 162.700 158.100
102 158.125 158.125 162.725 158.125
43 158.150 158.150 162.750 158.150
103 158.175 158.175 162.775 158.175
44 158.200 158.200 162.800 158.200
104 158.225 158.225 162.825 158.225
45 158.250 158.250 162.850 158.250
105 158.275 158.275 162.875 158.275
46 158.300 158.300 162.900 158.300
106 158.325 158.325 162.925 158.325
47 158.350 158.350 162.950 158.350
107 158.375 158.375 162.975 158.375
48 158.400 158.400 163.000 158.400
108 158.425 158.425 163.025 158.425
49 158.450 158.450 163.050 158.450
109 158.475 158.475 163.075 158.475
50 158.500 158.500 163.100 158.500
110 158.525 158.525 163.125 158.525
51 158.550 158.550 163.150 158.550
111 158.575 158.575 163.175 158.575
52 158.600 158.600 163.200 158.600
112 158.625 158.625 163.225 158.625
53 158.650 158.650 163.250 158.650
113 158.675 158.675 163.275 158.675

AP2-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

6/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
54 158.700 158.700 163.300 158.700
114 158.725 158.725 163.325 158.725
55 158.750 158.750 163.350 158.750
115 158.775 158.775 163.375 158.775
56 158.800 158.800 163.400 158.800
116 158.825 158.825 163.425 158.825
57 158.850 158.850 163.450 158.850
117 158.875 158.875 163.475 158.875
58 158.900 158.900 163.500 158.900
118 158.925 158.925 163.525 158.925
59 158.950 158.950 163.550 158.950
119 158.975 158.975 163.575 158.975
200 159.000 159.000 163.600 159.000
201 159.025 159.025 159.025
202 159.050 159.050 159.050
203 159.075 159.075 159.075
204 159.100 159.100 159.100
205 159.125 159.125 159.125
206 159.150 159.150 159.150
207 159.175 159.175 159.175
208 159.200 159.200 159.200
209 159.225 159.225 159.225
210 159.250 159.250 159.250
211 159.275 159.275 159.275
212 159.300 159.300 159.300
213 159.325 159.325 159.325
214 159.350 159.350 159.350
215 159.375 159.375 159.375
216 159.400 159.400 159.400
217 159.425 159.425 159.425

AP2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

7/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
218 159.450 159.450 159.450
219 159.475 159.475 159.475
220 159.500 159.500 159.500
221 159.525 159.525 159.525
222 159.550 159.550 159.550
223 159.575 159.575 159.575
224 159.600 159.600 159.600
225 159.625 159.625 159.625
226 159.650 159.650 159.650
227 159.675 159.675 159.675
228 159.700 159.700 159.700
229 159.725 159.725 159.725
230 159.750 159.750 159.750
231 159.775 159.775 159.775
232 159.800 159.800 159.800
233 159.825 159.825 159.825
234 159.850 159.850 159.850
235 159.875 159.875 159.875
236 159.900 159.900 159.900
237 159.925 159.925 159.925
238 159.950 159.950 159.950
239 159.975 159.975 159.975
240 160.000 160.000 160.000
241 160.025 160.025 160.025
242 160.050 160.050 160.050
243 160.075 160.075 160.075
244 160.100 160.100 160.100
245 160.125 160.125 160.125
246 160.150 160.150 160.150
247 160.175 160.175 160.175

AP2-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

8/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
248 160.200 160.200 160.200
249 160.225 160.225 160.225
250 160.250 160.250 160.250
251 160.275 160.275 160.275
252 160.300 160.300 160.300
253 160.325 160.325 160.325
254 160.350 160.350 160.350
255 160.375 160.375 160.375
256 160.400 160.400 160.400
257 160.425 160.425 160.425
258 160.450 160.450 160.450
259 160.475 160.475 160.475
140 160.500 160.500 160.500
141 160.525 160.525 160.525
142 160.550 160.550 160.550
143 160.575 160.575 160.575
144 160.600 160.600 160.600
145 160.625 160.625 160.625
146 160.650 160.650 160.650
147 160.675 160.675 160.675
148 160.700 160.700 160.700
149 160.725 160.725 160.725
150 160.750 160.750 160.750
151 160.775 160.775 160.775
152 160.800 160.800 160.800
153 160.825 160.825 160.825
154 160.850 160.850 160.850
155 160.875 160.875 160.875
156 160.900 160.900 160.900
157 160.925 160.925 160.925

AP2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AP2.3 Private Channel

9/9
FM-8800S FM-8800D
Channel Tx Rx Tx Rx
Simplex Simplex Semi-Dup Simp/Dup Simplex Duplex
158 160.950 160.950 160.950
159 160.975 160.975 160.975
160 161.000 161.000 161.000
161 161.025 161.025 161.025
162 161.050 161.050 161.050
163 161.075 161.075 161.075
164 161.100 161.100 161.100
165 161.125 161.125 161.125
166 161.150 161.150 161.150
167 161.175 161.175 161.175
168 161.200 161.200 161.200
169 161.225 161.225 161.225
170 161.250 161.250 161.250
171 161.275 161.275 161.275
172 161.300 161.300 161.300
173 161.325 161.325 161.325
174 161.350 161.350 161.350
175 161.375 161.375 161.375
176 161.400 161.400 161.400
177(M2) 161.425 161.425 161.425
178 161.450 161.450 161.450
179 161.475 161.475 161.475

AP2-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


+-ナベセムスネジB
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
ハンドセットハンガー M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
BRACET FOR HANDSET
A ゼンメンパネル
(000-881-404)
HG-8810 FM-8800S only
FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
TX/RXシールドカバー
TX/RX SHIELD COVER FM-8800S/D
MJ-PHコネクタ 05-093-1111-1 (005-377-780)
MJ-PJ CONNECTOR (100-323-051)
05-834(10-11P)
(005-377-650)
TBプリント
TB PCB
05P0798 FM-8800D only
(005-378-340) ケーブル(FPC)
DUPLEXER
FLAT CABLE +-ナベセムスネジB
CDH1561006A
SML2CD50X200AD6P.5S4 WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
(000-151-721)
(000-151-676) M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
+-ナベセムスネジB
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-881-404) PANEL/SQVRクミヒン SQ/VRプリント
PANEL/SQVR PCB SQ/VR PCB
デイストレスバネ FM-8800S/D 05P0787
ディストレスフタフクロヅメ DISTRESS SPRING DUPトリツケイタ 005-378-160) (005-378-190)
DISTRESS KEY COVER (PACKED) 05-085-1013-0 DUP MOUNTING PLATE
HG-8800 05-093-1141-0 エツジサドル
(100-323-130) PANELプリント
(005-378-320) EDGE SADDLE PANEL PCB
EDS-1717U 05P0772
シヤフトホルダ- デイストレスピン +-ナベセムスネジB (000-137-738) (005-377-920)
SHAFT HOLDER DISTRESS PIN WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
05-085-1014-0 05-085-1014-0 M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 +-バインドセムスF
デイストレスフタ (000-881-404) WASHER HEAD SCREW
DISTRESS LID M4X8 C2700 MBCR2
05-085-1011-2 PWRシールドカバー (000-806-407)
PHコネクタ
PWR SHIELD COVER
PMシールド1 PH CONNECTOR
05-093-1112-0
PM SHIELD 1 05-826(9-9P)
(100-323-060)
05-093-1132-0 +-ナベセムスネジB
VHコネクタ (100-323-100) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
VH CONNECTOR
SP-PHコネクタ M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 SPキヨウメイバコ
05-828(8-8P)
SP-PH CONNECTOR RESONATOR
(005-377-700)
05-832(スピーカ2P) SP-PHコネクタ 05-093-1011-0
(005-377-630) SP-PH CONNECTOR
05-827(スピーカ2P)
TX/RXプリント TX/RX PCB (005-377-680)
REMOTEプリント 05P0774A SPテープ
FM-8800S (005-378-220) SP TAPE
REMOTE PCB デンリユウハリマーク LABEL
B 05P0779
(005-378-300) FM-8800D
05P0774B
(005-378-230) FM-8800S
05-093-1151-0
(100-324-910)
05-093-1012-1
SPスペーサ
CHプリント
CH PCB
SP SPACER 05P0788
05-093-1251-0 05-093-1013-0 (005-378-200)
+-ナベセムスネジB FM-8800D (100-324-920)

MJ-PHコネクタ
B WASHER HEAD SCREW
M3X20 C2700W MBNI2
カバー
COVER ラバーキー
PHコネクタ
PH CONNECTOR
MJ-PH CONNECTOR (000-881-410) ケ-ブル(クミヒン) 05-093-1121-1 RUBBER KEY
(100-323-081) 05-835(5-5P)
05-831(10-11P) POWRプリント CABLE ASSEMBLY Mガタコネクタ M-TYPE CONNECTOR 05-093-1021-3
TBプリント (005-377-620) POWR PCB LR-02F1/STO-41T-187N 80-0672
FM-8800S
TB PCB 05P0776 (000-143-040) (005-959-640) フイルター
05P0782 (005-378-250) 80-0673 FILTER ツマミパツキン(S)
FM-8800D KNOB GASKET (S)
(005-378-310) (005-959-650) 05-093-1002-0
キヤツプ 05-093-1034-0
KNOB CAP
ハンドセットハンガー シヤーシ
040-3010
(000-515-322) +ナベセムスネジBK
BRACET FOR HANDSET CHASSIS WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK* ツマミパツキン(L)
HG-8800 05-093-1101/1102-3 M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 パネル KNOB GASKET (L)
(100-323-043) (000-804-626) PANEL 05-093-1032-0
05-093-1001-2
Mガタコネクタ
レクトラDスプリング
M-TYPE CONNECTOR
LECTRA D SPRING
ゼンメンパネル 80-0671 ハンガー ソウサハリマーク #6601-P
A FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
FM-8800S/D
(005-377-690)
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
FM-8800S/D
STICKER FOR OPERATION
05-093-1051-1
ツマミ(S)
KNOB (S)
05-093-1033-0 ツマミ(L)
(005-377-790) KNOB (L)
05-093-1031-0
+バインドコネジ ボウシンゴム(1)
BIND SCREW ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER (1)
M4X10 SUS304 05-077-1122-0 デイストレスバネ
DISTRESS SPRING デイストレスフタ
(000-861-865)

ボウシンゴム(2) 05-092-1014-1 DISTRESS LID


CH70-RXプリント ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER (2) 05-092-1011-1


TTP

CH70-RX PCB

05-077-1123-0
05P0775 PHコネクタ デイストレスピン シヤフトホルダー
ハンドセツトハンガー (005-378-240) PH CONNECTOR DISTRESS PIN SHAFT HOLDER
05-829(6-6P) 05-092-1013-0 05-092-1012-0
BRACKET FOR HANDSET ハンガ-ワツシヤ-
(005-377-710)
FP05-05510 PHコネクタ ハンガー BRACKET WASHER ディストレスフタフクロヅメ
(005-951-790) PH CONNECTOR BRACKET 05-029-0132-1 DISTRESS KEY COVER (PACKED)
CPUプリント 05-093-1201-0
05-830(15-15P) FM-8800S/D ブシュツヨウ
CPU PCB
(005-377-720) (005-378-140)
05P0773
(005-378-210)
ノブ(N3.0)
+ナベセムスネジBK KNOB (N3.0)
FM-8800D only
WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK 03-156-1042-0 MODEL FM8800S/D
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
DUP RXプリント (000-804-626)
DUP RX PCB
05P0777 ノブ
(005-378-380) KNOB
カブシールドカバー
BOTTOM SHIELD COVER
FP03-09204 APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT FM8800S/D 送受信機
+-ナベセムスネジB 05-093-1113-0 (008-523-650)
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* (100-323-070) 4 Aug. 2005 4 Aug. 2005 4 Aug. 2005 TRANSCEIVER UNIT
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-881-404)
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.Kubota DWG.NO. C5643-E01-B

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


+-ナベセムスB
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
M3X8 +-ナベセムスB
(000-881-404) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
M3X8
(P)SQ/VRプリント (000-881-404)
SQ/VR BOAD
05P0787
(P)PANELプリント (005-378-190) SPキヨウメイバコ
PANEL BOAD RESONATOR
05P0772 05-093-1011
(005-377-920) (100-314-600)
SPスペーサ
SP SPACER
ケーブル(FPC) 05-093-1013
FLAT CABLE (100-322-960)
SML2CD50X200AD6P.5S4 (組)SP-PHコネクタ
(000-151-676) SP-PH CONNECTOR
(組)PHコネクタ
(組)PHコネクタ 05-827(スピーカ2P) (P)CHプリント
PH CONNECTOR
PH CONNECTOR (005-377-680) CH BOAD
05-835(5-5P)
05-826(9-9P) 05P0788
(005-377-670)
(005-377-660) (005-378-200)
SPテープ
SP TAPE
フイルター 05-093-1012
FILTER (100-322-950)
05-093-1002
(100-322-940)

ラバーキー ツマミパツキン(S)
RUBBER KEY KNOB GASKET (S)
05-093-1021 05-093-1034
(100-322-972) (100-323-010)

パネル
PANEL
05-093-1001
(100-322-932)

レクトラDスプリング
LECTRA D SPRING
#6601-P
デイストレスバネ (000-802-139)
DISTRESS SPRING
デイストレスフタ 05-092-1014 ツマミ(S)
DISTRESS LID (100-312-211) A KNOB (S)
05-092-1011 05-093-1033
(100-312-181) (100-323-000)
デイストレスピン
DISTRESS PIN ツマミパツキン(L) ツマミ(L)
05-092-1013 KNOB GASKET (L)
(100-312-200) KNOB (L)
05-093-1032 05-093-1031
シヤフトホルダー (100-322-990)
SHAFT HOLDER
(100-322-980)
05-092-1012
(100-312-190)

ソウサハリマーク
STICKER FOR OPERATION
05-093-1051
(100-323-030)

MODEL FM-8800S/D
A
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT FM-8800S/D  (組)前面パネル
14 DEC 2004 14 DEC 2004 14 DEC 2004 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY

H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida M.Nakanishi DWG.NO. C5643-E02-A


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
+-バインドセムスF
WASHER HEAD SCREW
M4X8 C2700 MBCR2
(000-806-407)
フタ
LID
24-003-4002-3
(100-299-703)

+-ナベセムスネジB
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-881-404)
IF-8810 IF-8820
JUNCTIONプリント I/Fプリント
WING NUT M4 SUS304 JUNCTION PCB I/F PCB
SW M4 SUS304 05P0790 05P0778
PW M4 SUS304 (005-378-280) (005-378-290)

オサエイタB
FIXING PLATE B
24-003-4007-0
(100-303-990) オサエイタA
FIXING PLATE A
24-003-4006-0
(100-303-980)

オサエイタ
FIXING PLATE
24-003-4004-1
(100-299-711)

IF-8810 only
ケ-ブル(クミヒン)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
DSUB37M-PHX3-L5000
(000-151-722)

カ-ドスペ-サ
CARD SPACER
KGPS-6RF ケ-ス
(000-808-324) CASE
24-003-4001-3
(100-299-693)

MODEL FM-8800S/D

APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT IF-8810/8820 接続箱/DMCインターフェイス


4 Aug. 2005 4 Aug. 2005 4 Aug. 2005 JUNCTION BOX/DMC INTERFACE UNIT

H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.Kubota DWG.NO. C5643-E03-A


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents of Drawings

Name Type Dwg. No. Page


Interconnection Diagram FM-8800S/D C5642-C01 S-1
General Schematic Diagram FM-8800S/D C5642-K01 S-2
TX/RX(1/4) C5642-K17 S-3
TX/RX(2/4) C5642-K18 S-4
05P0774
TX/RX(3/4) C5642-K19 S-5
TX/RX(4/4) C5642-K20 S-6
CH70 RX 05P0775 C5642-K21 S-7
DUP RX(1/2) C5642-K23 S-8
05P0777
DUP RX(2/2) C5642-K24 S-9
PWR 05P0776 C5642-K22 S-10
CPU(1/6) C5642-K11 S-11
CPU(2/6) C5642-K12 S-12
CPU(3/6) C5642-K13 S-13
05P0773
CPU(4/6) C5642-K14 S-14
CPU(5/6) C5642-K15 S-15
CPU(6/6) C5642-K16 S-16
PANEL 05P0772 C5642-K25 S-17
Junction Box
IF-8810 C5642-K02 S-18
General Schematic Diagram
DMC Interface
IF-8820 C5642-K03 S-19
General Schematic Diagram
DMC IF 05P0778 C5642-K26 S-20
Handset
HS-2003 C5642-K04 S-21
General Schematic Diagram
Handset 05P0780 C5642-K05 S-22
Remote Station
RB-8800 C5642-K06 S-23
General Schematic Diagram
Remote 05P0779 C5642-K09 S-24
TB 05P0782 C5642-K10 S-25
Handset
HS-8800 C5642-K07 S-26
General Schematic Diagram
HS CONT 05P0781 C5642-K27 S-27
KEY 05P0715 C5642-K28 S-28
Remote Station
RB-8810 C5642-K08 S-29
General Schematic Diagram
TB 05P0798 C5642-K29 S-30
AC-DC Power Supply PR-240-CE C5003-K04 S-31
FM-8800S
General Schematic Diagram C5643-K01 S-32
(Russian Ver.)
05P0804
RTC C5643-K02 S-33
(Russian Ver.)
CPU(3/6) 05P0773 C5643-K03 S-34
CPU(4/6) (Russian Ver.) C5643-K04 S-35

S-0

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1 2 3 4 5 6
*2 航法装置,プロッタ *2 *2
NAVIGATION Wing Mic *2 Wing Mic *2
DEVICE, PLOTTER マイクレセプタクルボックス マイクレセプタクルボックス
RXD(H) ハンドセット MIC RECEPTACLE BOX ハンドセット MIC RECEPTACLE BOX
RXD(C) HANDSET HANDSET
接続箱 RBD-VHF(B) RBD-VHF(B)
T/R用アンテナ
送受信機 TXD(H)
TB1 TB1
JUNCTION BOX TXD(C) キ YEL キ YEL
ANTENNA FOR T/R
TRANSCEIVER UNIT HS-6000FZ-11 1 1
シロ WHT P
HS-6000FZ-11 1 1
シロ WHT P
IF-8810 *2 HS-6000FZ-5 2 2 HS-6000FZ-5 2 2
*2
FM-8800D/S CO-SPEVV-SB-C 3 3
アカ RED 3 3
アカ RED
IEC61162-1(NMEA)/REMOTE D-SUB 37P *4 0.2X2P,φ10.5 *1 4 キ YEL P 4 キ YEL P
J1 TTYCS-1 MAX. 20m 外部アラーム
A CH70 WR用アンテナ +15VDC 1 1 TXD(H) 1 キ YEL 5 4 クロ BLK 5 4 クロ BLK
ANTENNA FOR CH70 WR P P ダイ ORG キ YEL P キ YEL P
+15VDC 2 2 TXD(C) 2 Ext. Alarm *1 6 6
*2 +15VDC 3 3 RXD(H) 3 アカ RED 7 7
P P チャ BRN
+15VDC 4 4 RXD(C) 4
N.C 5 5 F.GND 5
P EXT.ALM_N CO-SPEVV-SB-C 0.2x5P,φ13.5 MAX. 20m *2
N.C 6 6 6
ANT CO-SPEVV-SB-C 0.2x5P,φ13.5 MAX.20m *2
M-P-5 TXD(H) 7 7 *7 0V 7
1 P F.GND *4
TXD(C) 8 8 8
2 RXD(H) 9 W-MIC1(H) アカ RED ハンドセット ハンドセット ハンドセット ハンドセット
9 9
P W-MIC1(C)
Pキ YEL *2 *2 *2 *2
RXD(C) 10 10 10 HANDSET HANDSET HANDSET HANDSET
W-SP1(H) 11 クロ BLK
CH70 RX ANT HS-8800 HS-8800 HS-8800 HS-8800
Pキ YEL
M-P-5 J2 W-SP1(C) 12
W-PTT1_N 13 シロ WHT
1 EXT.ALM_N 11 1
P Pキ YEL リモートステーション 1 リモートステーション 2 リモートステーション 3 リモートステーション 4
2 0V 12 2 0V 14
F.GND 15 *4 REMOTE STATION *2 REMOTE STATION *2 REMOTE STATION *2 REMOTE STATION *2
W-MIC1(H) 13 3 RB-8800/RB-8810 RB-8800/RB-8810 RB-8800/RB-8810 RB-8800/RB-8810
P W-MIC2(H) アカ RED
W-MIC1(C) 14 4 16
Pキ YEL *3 DATA_A 1 *3 DATA_A 1 *3 DATA_A 1 *3 DATA_A 1
W-SP1(H) 15 5 W-MIC2(C) 17
P クロ BLK DATA_B 2 DATA_B 2 DATA_B 2 DATA_B 2
W-SP1(C) 16 6 W-SP2(H) 18 *5
Pキ YEL CONT 3 CONT 3 CONT 3 CONT 3
W-PTT1_N 17 7 W-SP2(C) 19
P シロ WHT DIST_SW 4 DIST_SW 4 DIST_SW 4 DIST_SW 4
0V 18 8 W-PTT2_N 20
B Pキ YEL LINE OUT(H) 5 LINE OUT(H) 5 LINE OUT(H) 5 LINE OUT(H) 5
0V 19 9 0V 21
P LINE I/O(C) 6 LINE I/O(C) 6 LINE I/O(C) 6 LINE I/O(C) 6
0V 20 10 F.GND 22
HANDSET TTYCS-1 MAX. 20m *1 LINE IN(H) 7 LINE IN(H) 7 LINE IN(H) 7 LINE IN(H) 7
0V 21 11 VDR AF(H) 23
ハンドセット P VDR AF(C) 24
VDR +15V1 8 +15V1 8 +15V1 8 +15V1 8
1 S.GND 0V 22 12 OV 9 OV 9 OV 9 OV 9
HANDSET 2 PTT SW_N NOT USED_1 25 *4
終端まで最大50m F.GND 10 F.GND 10 F.GND 10 F.GND 10
3 MIC(H) NOT USED_2 26 *2
HS-2003 J3 MAX. 50m TO LAST UNIT TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2
4 MIC(C) VDR AF(H) 23 1 F.GND 27 05S0309
P +15VDC シロ(太) WHT(BIG) +15VDC 1 シロ(太) WHT(BIG)
5 HS SP(H) VDR AF(C) 24 2 28 1 1
P クロ(太) BLK(BIG) Pクロ(太) BLK(BIG)
6 HOOK SW_N DATA_A 25 3 0V 29 2 OV 2 2
P DATA_A ミドリ GRN DATA_A 3 ミドリ GRN
7 +5V DATA_B 26 4 30 3 3
P アオ BLU Pアオ BLU
8 F.GND LINE OUT(H) 27 5 DATA_B 31 4 DATA_B 4 4
P LINE IN(H) キ YEL LINE IN(H) 5 アカ RED
LINE OUT(C) 28 6 32 5 5 左と同じ 左と同じ
P ダイ ORG Pチャ BRN
LINE IN(H) 29 7 LINE IN(C) 33 6 LINE IN(C) 6 6
P アカ RED キ YEL Same as Same as
LINE IN(C) 30 8 LINE OUT(H) 34 7 LINE OUT(H) 7 7 left left
P チャ BRN LINE OUT(C) 8 Pダイ ORG
W-MIC2(H) 31 9 LINE OUT(C) 35 8 8
P F.GND 36 *4 TB3 TB3 TB3 TB3
SPKR W-MIC2(C) 32 10
外部スピーカ W-SP2(H) 33 11 N.C 37 シロ(太) WHT(BIG)
1 SP(H) P +15VDC 38 IV-1.25 *1 IV-1.25sq. *1 IV-1.25sq. *1 IV-1.25sq. *1
EXT. SP 2.8 m W-SP2(C) 34 12 P クロ(太) BLK(BIG)
2 SP(C) 0V 39
W-PTT2_N 35 13 ミドリ GRN
SEM-21Q *2 0V P DATA_A 40
36 14 P アオ BLU
C F.GND 37 DATA_B 41 キ YEL
*2 リモートステーション
LINE IN(H) 42 05S0309 REMOTE STATION *2 ハンドセット *2
P ダイ ORG
終端まで最大50m RB-8800/RB-8810
LINE IN(C) 43 HANDSET 上に同じ
アカ RED MAX. 50m TO LAST UNIT *3
LINE OUT(H) 44 Same as
*1 P チャ BRN *5 HS-8800 above
*2 LINE OUT(C) 45
DPYC-1.5 F.GND 46
100-115/ AC AC/DC電源 PRINTER D-SUB 25P *4
200-230 VAC STROBE_N 1 N.C 47 DMC I/F *2
IN AC-DC POWER N.C 48
SUPPLY D0 2 IF-8820 TB1 TB2
*1 D1 3
DPYC-2.5 PR-240-CE 1 11 1 +15VDC
*2 DC + D2 4 2 12
24 VDC + 24VDC 2 OV
D3 5 IV-1.25sq.
- IN OUT - 3 13 3 DATA_A
D4 6 *1
4 14 4 DATA_B
D5 7 5 17 上に同じ
PE 保護アース 5 LINE IN(H)
D6 8 6 18 Same as
IV-2sq. *1 6 LINE IN(C)
D7 9 7 15 above
24VDC 7 LINE OUT(H) 遭難警報装置 *2
ACK_N 10 8 16 8 LINE OUT(C)
RED RED BUSY 11 VCTF0.75x3C,5m,φ7 9 F.GND F.GND 19 TB3
DISTRESS MESSAGE CONTROLLER
24 VDC 24VDC(+) PE 12 プリンタ*2 24VDC
05S9371,3m 24VDC(-) 17JE-23250-02,3m アカ RED 10 N.C IV-1.25sq.*1 DMC-5
SELECT 13 + 1 *4 TB1/TB2
15A
BLK BLK PRINTER クロ BLK
ALF_N 14 - 2 ダイ ORG
D 注記 *1)造船所手配 ERROR_N 15 PP-510 GND 3
シロ WHT TXD(H) 20
P キ YEL
1 TXD(H)
*2)オプション
TXD(C) 21 2 TXD(C)
INIT._N 16 RXD(H) チャ BRN 3 RXD(H)
*3)最大4台まで接続可能 22
SLCT IN_N 17 P アカ RED
*4)ケーブルクランプで接地
RXD(C) 23 4 RXD(C)
F.GND 18 F.GND 24 *1 CO-SPEVV-SB-C 6 F.GND
*5)終端のユニットでは内部で 0V 19 0.2x2P(5/10/15/20/30m)
ジャンパー(J2, J3)をONにする。 F.GND 20
*6)P: 撚り対線 IV-1.25sq.
F.GND 21 *1
*7)オープンコレクタ出力、最大1A、耐圧≦50V F.GND 22 DRAWN TITLE
F.GND 23 VCTF0.75x2C,3m Dec.19,'05 E.MIYOSHI FM-8800D/S
NOTE *1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY F.GND 24 プリンタ*2 シロ WHT
24VDC
CHECKED
05S9312,1.9m 名称
*2.
*3.
OPTION
Max. 4 sets GND
F.GND 25 PRINTER + 1
クロ BLK TAKAHASHI.T 国際VHF無線電話装置
- 2
APPROVED
*4.
*5.
GROUND THROUGH CABLE CLAMP.
CONNECT JUMPERS (J2 & J3)
PP-8800 相互結線図
ON TERMINATED REMOTE STATION. *1 SCALE MASS NAME
IV-2sq. kg VHF RADIOTELEPHONE
*6. P: TWISTED PAIR CABLE
DWG No.
*7. OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT, MAX. 1A, LESS THAN 50VDC C5642-C01- G INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like